Nokia Solutions and Networks T5EE1 SC4812T Lite 1X/EVDO @ 800 MHz CDMA BTS User Manual TLite

Nokia Solutions and Networks SC4812T Lite 1X/EVDO @ 800 MHz CDMA BTS TLite

UserManual.wiki >

Nokia Solutions and Networks >

T5EE1 User Manual >

Users Manual 1 HTML Version

1. Users Manual 1
2. Users Manual 2

Users Manual 1

DRAFT

68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

ENGLISH

CDMA

Software Release R2.16.1.x

Technical

Information

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP

800 Mhz

DRAFT

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

Notice

While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola, Inc. assumes no liability resulting from any

inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from use of the information obtained herein. The information in this document has been

carefully checked and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies or omissions. Motorola,

Inc. reserves the right to make changes to any products described herein and reserves the right to revise this document and to make

changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any person of revisions or changes. Motorola, Inc. does not

assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product, software, or circuit described herein; neither does it convey

license under its patent rights or the rights of others.

It is possible that this publication may contain references to, or information about Motorola products (machines and programs),

programming, or services that are not announced in your country. Such references or information must not be construed to mean

that Motorola intends to announce such Motorola products, programming, or services in your country.

Copyrights

This instruction manual, and the Motorola products described in this instruction manual may be, include or describe copyrighted

Motorola material, such as computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and

other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted material, including the exclusive right to copy,

reproduce in any form, distribute and make derivative works of the copyrighted material. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola

material contained herein or in the Motorola products described in this instruction manual may not be copied, reproduced,

distributed, merged or modified in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of

Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the

copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, as arises by operation of law in the sale of a product.

Usage and Disclosure Restrictions

License Agreement

The software described in this document is the property of Motorola, Inc. It is furnished by express license agreement only and may

be used only in accordance with the terms of such an agreement.

Copyrighted Materials

Software and documentation are copyrighted materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law. No part of the software or

documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or

computer language, in any form or by any means, without prior written permission of Motorola, Inc.

High Risk Activities

Components, units, or third–party products used in the product described herein are NOT fault–tolerant and are NOT designed,

manufactured, or intended for use as on–line control equipment in the following hazardous environments requiring fail–safe

controls: the operation of Nuclear Facilities, Aircraft Navigation or Aircraft Communication Systems, Air Traffic Control, Life

Support, or Weapons Systems (“High Risk Activities”). Motorola and its supplier(s) specifically disclaim any expressed or implied

warranty of fitness for such High Risk Activities.

DRAFT

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

Trademarks

and Motorola are registered trademarks of Motorola, Inc.

Product and service names profiled herein are trademarks of Motorola, Inc. Other manufacturers’ products or services profiled

herein may be referred to by trademarks of their respective companies.

Printed on

Recyclable Paper

REV012501

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS

Optimization/ATP

Table of Contents

Table of Contents 68P64115A18–1

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

ii Mar 2003

Contents

FCC Requirements xviii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Content xviii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FCC Part 15 Requirements xviii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FCC Part 68 Requirements xix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Foreword xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General Safety xxii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Revision History xxiv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 1 Introduction 1-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Optimization Manual Scope and Layout 1-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Manual Scope and Layout 1-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Assumptions and Prerequisites 1-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Document Composition 1-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Purpose of the Optimization 1-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Why Optimize? 1-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

What Is Optimization? 1-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

What Happens During Optimization? 1-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

When to Optimize 1-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

New Installations 1-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Site Expansion 1-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Periodic Optimization 1-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Repaired Sites 1-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Required Test Equipment and Software 1-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview 1-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Policy 1-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Equipment Calibration 1-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Cable Calibration 1-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Equipment Warm–up 1-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LMF computer and software 1-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Communications system analyzer CDMA/analog 1-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Optional Equipment 1-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Required Documents and Related Publications 1-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Required Documents 1-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Related Publications 1-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Terms and Abbreviations 1-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Standard and Non–standard Terms and Abbreviations 1-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BTS Equipment Identification 1-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Equipment Overview 1-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Frame Configurations 1-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Logical BTS 1-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Internal Assemblies and FRUs 1-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SCCP Cage Configuration and 1X Devices 1-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BBX–1X and BBX2 Interchangeability 1-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BTS Sector Configurations 1-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 2 Preliminary Operations 2-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preliminary Operations: Overview 2-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction 2-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents

68P64115A18–1

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

iii

Mar 2003

Cell–site Types 2-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CDF/NECF 2-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Site Equipage Verification 2-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Initial Installation of Boards/Modules 2-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting Frame SCCP Configuration Switch 2-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ethernet LAN 2-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ethernet LAN Termination 2-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pre-Initial Power-up Tests 2-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction 2-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Required Tools 2-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cabling Inspection 2-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Initial Inspection and Setup 2-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DC Power System Pre-power Application Test 2-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

External AC Power Connection Verification 2-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Applying AC Power 2-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DC Power Application and Testing 2-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries) 2-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Battery Discharge Test 2-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power Removal 2-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction 2-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Remove DC Power 2-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AC Power Removal 2-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power Application – Normal Power–up 2-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power Application Procedures 2-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Applying Internal AC Power 2-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Apply DC Power 2-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 3 Optimization/Calibration 3-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction to Optimization and Calibration 3-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview 3-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Optimization Process Summary 3-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cell-site Types 3-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CDF/NECF 3-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BTS System Software Download 3-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Site Equipage Verification 3-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preparing the LMF 3-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of Packet BTS files 3-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LMF Features and Installation Requirements 3-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LMF File Structure Overview 3-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LMF Home Directory 3-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NECF Filename Conventions and Directory Location 3-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LMF Installation and Update Procedures 3-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Copy BTS and CBSC CDF (or NECF) Files to the LMF Computer 3-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Creating a Named HyperTerminal Connection for MMI Communication 3-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Span Lines – Interface and Isolation 3-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

T1/E1 Span Interface 3-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Isolate BTS from T1/E1 Span(s) 3-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

T1/E1 Span Isolation 3-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LMF to BTS Connection 3-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connect the LMF to the BTS 3-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using the LMF 3-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents 68P64115A18–1

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

iv Mar 2003

Basic LMF Operation 3-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The LMF Display and the BTS 3-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Graphical User Interface Overview 3-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Understanding GUI Operation 3-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Command Line Interface Overview 3-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Logging Into a BTS 3-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Logging Out 3-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Establishing an MMI Communication Session 3-31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Online Help 3-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pinging the Processors 3-33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pinging the BTS 3-33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Download the BTS 3-36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview 3-36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ROM Code 3-36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RAM Code 3-36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Verify GLI ROM Code Loads 3-38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Download RAM Code and Data to MGLI and GLI 3-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Download RAM Code and Data to Non–GLI Devices 3-40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Selecting CSM Clock Source and Enabling CSMs 3-41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Enable MCCs 3-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification 3-44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM) Sub–system Description 3-44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front Panel LEDs 3-45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Low Frequency Receiver/High Stability Oscillator (LFR/HSO) 3-46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSM Frequency Verification 3-47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Equipment Setup

(GPS & LFR/HSO Verification) 3-47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GPS Initialization/Verification 3-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LORAN–C Initialization/Verification 3-53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Equipment Set-up 3-55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connecting Test Equipment to the BTS 3-55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Supported Test Equipment 3-56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Equipment Warm-up 3-59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Set Calibration 3-72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Background 3-72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibration Procedures Included 3-72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GPIB Addresses 3-73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Selecting Test Equipment 3-73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Manually Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab 3-74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatically Selecting Test Equipment in the Serial Connection Tab 3-75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibrating Test Equipment 3-76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibrating Cables Overview 3-77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibrating Test Cabling using Communications System Analyzer 3-78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibrate Test Cabling Using Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer 3-79 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting Cable Loss Values 3-81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting TX Coupler Loss Value 3-82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Bay Level Offset Calibration 3-83 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Purpose of Bay Level Offset Calibration 3-83 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

What is BLO Calibration? 3-83 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Component Verification During Calibration 3-84 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

When to Calibrate BLOs 3-84 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BLO Calibration Data File 3-84 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents

68P64115A18–1

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

Mar 2003

Test Equipment Setup for RF Path Calibration 3-88 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Transmit (TX) Path Calibration Description 3-88 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX Calibration and the LMF 3-89 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX Calibration 3-91 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All Cal/Audit and TX Calibration Procedure 3-92 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Download BLO Procedure 3-94 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibration Audit Introduction 3-95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX Path Audit 3-95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX Audit Test 3-95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Create CAL File 3-97 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RFDS Set–up and Calibration 3-98 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RFDS Description 3-98 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RFDS Parameters 3-98 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking and Setting RFDS Parameters 3-99 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RFDS TSU NAM Programming 3-102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Explanation of Parameters Used When Programming the TSU NAM 3-102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Valid NAM Ranges 3-103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Set Antenna Map Data 3-104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Set RFDS Configuration Data 3-105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RFDS Calibration 3-106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Program TSU NAM 3-108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Alarms Testing 3-109 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Alarm Verification 3-109 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Alarm Reporting Display 3-109 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Alarm Testing Set–up 3-109 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AC Fail Alarm 3-110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Minor Alarm 3-110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Before Leaving the Site 3-110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 4 Automated Acceptance Test Procedures 4-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automated Acceptance Test Procedure 4-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction 4-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reduced ATP 4-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ATP Test Options 4-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ATP Prerequisites 4-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX/RX Antenna Connections 4-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Acceptance Tests – Test Set–up 4-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Required Test Equipment 4-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Acceptance Test Equipment Set Up 4-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests 4-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All–inclusive Tests 4-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All TX/RX ATP Test 4-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All TX ATP Test 4-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All RX ATP Test 4-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Individual Acceptance Tests 4-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Individual Tests 4-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test 4-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Background 4-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Spectral Purity TX Mask Acceptance Test 4-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX Waveform Quality (Rho) Acceptance Test 4-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Background 4-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents 68P64115A18–1

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

vi Mar 2003

Waveform Quality (Rho) Acceptance Test 4-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test 4-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Background 4-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test 4-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test 4-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Background 4-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Test 4-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RX FER Acceptance Test 4-27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Background 4-27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FER Acceptance Test 4-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Generating an ATP Report 4-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Background 4-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ATP Report 4-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 5 Leaving the Site 5-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Updating Calibration Data Files 5-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Prepare to Leave the Site 5-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Removing External Test Equipment 5-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reset All Devices and Initialize Site Remotely 5-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Bringing Modules into Service with the LMF 5-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Terminating LMF Session/Removing Terminal 5-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connecting BTS T1/E1 Spans 5-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Before Leaving the site 5-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 6 Basic Troubleshooting 6-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Basic Troubleshooting: Overview 6-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview 6-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Troubleshooting: Installation 6-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cannot Log into Cell-Site 6-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cannot Communicate with Power Meter 6-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cannot Communicate with Communications System Analyzer 6-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cannot Communicate with Signal Generator 6-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Troubleshooting: Download 6-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cannot Download DATA to Any Device (Card) 6-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cannot ENABLE Device 6-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LPA Errors 6-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Troubleshooting: Calibration 6-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Bay Level Offset Calibration Failure 6-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibration Audit Failure 6-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Basic Troubleshooting: RF Path Fault Isolation 6-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview 6-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If Every Test Fails 6-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Verify BLO Checkbox 6-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Single–Sided BLO Checkbox 6-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If Faults Are Isolated 6-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fault Isolation Flowchart 6-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Flowchart Prerequisites 6-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX Power Output Fault Isolation Flowchart 6-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP 6-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BTS Passed Reduced ATP Tests but Has Forward Link Problem in Normal Operation 6-15 . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents

68P64115A18–1

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

vii

Mar 2003

Cannot Perform TX Mask Measurement 6-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cannot Perform Rho or Pilot Time Offset Measurement 6-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cannot Perform Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement 6-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Troubleshooting: Receive ATP 6-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Multi–FER Test Failure 6-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Troubleshooting: CSM Check–list 6-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Problem Description 6-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Intermittent 19.6608 MHz Reference Clock / GPS Receiver Operation 6-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

No GPS Reference Source 6-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checksum Failure 6-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GPS Bad RX Message Type 6-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSM Reference Source Configuration Error 6-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Takes Too Long for CSM to Come INS 6-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Troubleshooting: SCCP Backplane 6-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction 6-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connector Functionality 6-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting Procedure 6-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Digital Control Problems 6-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DC Power Problems 6-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX and RX Signal Routing Problems 6-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Troubleshooting: RFDS 6-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction 6-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All Tests Fail 6-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All RX and TX Paths Fail 6-27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All Tests Fail on a Single Antenna 6-27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors 6-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Module Status Indicators 6-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Module LED Status (except GLI2, CSM, BBX, MCC) 6-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DC/DC Converter LED Status Combinations 6-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSM LED Status Combinations 6-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GLI2 LED Status Combinations 6-31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GLI2 Pushbuttons and Connectors 6-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BBX LED Status Combinations 6-33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MCC LED Status Combinations 6-33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LPA LED Status Combinations 6-34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Troubleshooting: Span Control Link 6-35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Span Problems (No Control Link) 6-35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Set BTS Site Span Configuration 6-37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix A Data Sheets A-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets A-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Verification of Test Equipment Used A-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Site Checklist A-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preliminary Operations A-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pre–Power and Initial Power Tests A-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General Optimization Checklist A-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GPS Receiver Operation A-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LFR Receiver Operation A-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LPA IM Reduction A-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX Bay Level Offset / Power Output Verification for 3–Sector Configurations A-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX Antenna VSWR A-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RX Antenna VSWR A-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents 68P64115A18–1

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

viii Mar 2003

Alarm Verification A-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Site Serial Number Check List A-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SCCP Shelf A-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LPAs A-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix B PN Offset/I & Q Offset Register Programming Information B-1 . . . . . . . .

PN Offset Programming Information B-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PN Offset Background B-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PN Offset Usage B-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix C FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix C-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix C-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Usage & Background C-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Detailed Optimization/ATP Test Matrix C-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix D BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output D-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output D-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Usage & Background D-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix E CDMA Operating Frequency Information E-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information E-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction E-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1900 MHz PCS Channels E-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calculating 1900 MHz Center Frequencies E-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

800 MHz CDMA Channels E-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calculating 800 MHz Center Frequencies E-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix F Test Equipment Preparation F-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Equipment Preparation F-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Purpose F-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses F-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester GPIB Address F-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Agilent E4432B Signal Generator GPIB Address F-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Advantest R3267 Spectrum Analyzer GPIB Address F-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Advantest R3562 Signal Generator GPIB Address F-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Agilent 8935 Series E6380 (formerly HP 8935) Test Set GPIB Address F-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hewlett Packard HP8921A and HP83236A/B GPIB Address F-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Advantest R3465 Communications Test Set GPIB Address F-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Motorola CyberTest GPIB Address F-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HP 437 Power Meter GPIB Address F-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address F-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RS232 GPIB Interface Adapter F-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Equipment Inter–unit Connection, Testing, and Control F-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Inter–unit Connection, Testing, and Control Settings F-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HP 8921A with PCS Interface Test Equipment Connections F-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HP 8921A with PCS Interface System Connectivity Test F-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pretest Setup for HP 8921A F-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pretest Setup for Agilent 8935 F-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Advantest R3465 Connection F-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

R3465 GPIB Clock Set–up F-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents

68P64115A18–1

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

Mar 2003

Pretest Setup for Advantest R3465 F-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Agilent 8932/E4432B Test Equipment Interconnection F-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Agilent E4406A/E4432B Test Equipment Interconnection F-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Advantest R3267/R3562 Test Equipment Interconnection F-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Equipment Calibration F-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibration Without the LMF F-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester Self–alignment (Calibration) F-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibrating HP 437 Power Meter F-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibrating Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter F-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Manual Cable Calibration F-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibrating Test Cable Setup

Using HP PCS Interface (HP83236) F-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465 F-33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix G Download ROM Code G-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Downloading ROM Code G-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Exception Procedure – Downloading ROM Code G-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix H In–service Calibration H-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction H-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Purpose H-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Equipment Stabilization and Calibration H-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1X Test Equipment Requirements H-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power Delta Calibration H-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction H-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration H-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Advantest R3267 Power Delta Calibration H-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Agilent 8935 series E6380A Power Delta Calibration H-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HP8921A Power Delta Calibration H-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Advantest R3465 Power Delta Calibration H-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

In–Service Calibration H-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Index Index-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents 68P64115A18–1

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

xMar 2003

List of Figures

Figure 1-1: Null Modem Cable Detail 1-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-2: 1X SCt4812T–Lite BTS Frame 1-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-3: I/O Interconnect Plate 1-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-4: SCCP Shelf 1-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-5: DRF and TRF Details 1-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-6: SC4812T Lite Stand–alone PA Configuration with Bandpass Filters 1-27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-7: SC4812T Lite Companion Frame LPA Configuration with 2:1 Combiners 1-27 . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 2-1: 800 MHz Configuration Switch Card 2-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 2-2: Backplane DIP Switch Settings 2-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 2-3: External Ethernet LAN Connectors 2-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 2-4: DC PDA 2-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 2-5: Meter Alarm Panel (MAP) 2-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 2-6: Heat Exchanger Blower Assembly and Circuit Breakers 2-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-1: LMF Folder Structure 3-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-2: Span I/O Board T1 Span Isolation 3-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-3: LMF Connection Detail 3-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-4: BTS Login screen – identifying circuit and packet BTS files 3-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-5: Self–Managed Network Elements (NEs) state of a packet mode SC4812T 3-22 . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-6: Available packet mode commands 3-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-7: Packet mode site with MCC–1 and BBX–1 under LMF control 3-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-8: LMF Computer Common MMI Connections 3-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-9: BTS Ethernet LAN Termination Diagram 3-33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-10: CSM MMI Terminal Connection 3-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-11: IS–95A/B Cable Calibration Test Setup –

CyberTest, Agilent 8935, Advantest R3465, and HP 8921A 3-60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-12: IS–95A/B and CDMA 2000 1X Cable Calibration Test Setup –

Agilent E4406A/E4432B and Advantest R3267/R3562 3-61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-13: CDMA2000 1X Cable Calibration Test Setup –

Agilent 8935/E4432B and Agilent E7495A 3-62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-14: TX Calibration Test Setup –

CyberTest (IS–95A/B) and Agilent 8935 (IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X) 3-63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-15: TX Calibration Test Setup – Using Power Meter 3-64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-16: TX Calibration Test Setup –

Agilent E4406A and Advantest R3567 (IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X) 3-65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-17: IS–95A/B ATP Test Set–up, TRDC Shown –

CyberTest, Advantest R3465, and Agilent 8935 3-66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-18: IS–95A/B ATP Test Setup – HP 8921A 3-67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-19: IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X ATP Test Setup With DRDCs –

Agilent Test Equipment 3-68 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-20: IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X ATP Test Setup With DRDCs –

Advantest R3267/3562 Test Equipment 3-69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-21: IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X ATP Test Setup With TRDCs –

Agilent Test Equipment 3-70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents

68P64115A18–1

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

Mar 2003

Figure 3-22: IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X ATP Test Setup With TRDCs –

Advantest R3267/3562 Test Equipment, Agilent E7495A 3-71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-23: Cal Setup for TX/Duplexed RX Test Cabling Using Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer . .

3-79

Figure 3-24: Cal Setup for Non–Duplexed RX Test Cabling Using Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer

3-80

Figure 4-1: SC4812ET Lite Companion Frame Diversity RX Simplified Interconnection Diagram 4-5

Figure 4-2: TX Mask Verification Spectrum Analyzer Display 4-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 4-3: Code Domain Analyzer CD Power/Noise Floor Display Examples 4-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 6-1: TX Output Fault Isolation Flowchart 6-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 6-2: CSM Front Panel Indicators & Monitor Ports 6-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 6-3: GLI2 Front Panel Operating Indicators 6-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 6-4: MCC24 and MCC–1X Front Panel LEDs and LED Indications 6-34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 6-5: MGLI/GLI Board MMI Connection Detail 6-36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure E-1: North America PCS Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation) E-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure E-2: North American Cellular Telephone System Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation). E-5

Figure F-1: Setting Agilent E4406A GPIB Address F-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure F-2: Setting Agilent E4432B GPIB Address F-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure F-3: Setting Advantest R3267 GPIB Address F-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure F-4: Advantest R3562 GPIB Address Switch Setting F-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure F-5: Agilent 8935 Test Set F-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure F-6: HP 8921A and HP 83236A/B F-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure F-7: R3465 Communications Test Set F-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure F-8: HP 437 Power Meter F-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure F-9: Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter Detail F-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure F-10: RS232 GPIB Interface Adapter F-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure F-11: HP 8921A/600 Cable Connections for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB without Rubidium Reference

F-15

Figure F-12: HP 8921A Cable Connections for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB with Rubidium Reference . . . . . .

F-17

Figure F-13: Cable Connections for Test Set without 10 MHz Rubidium Reference F-20 . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure F-14: Cable Connections for Test Set with 10 MHz Rubidium Reference F-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure F-15: Agilent 8935/E4432B 10MHz Reference and Even Second Tick Connections F-22 . . . . .

Figure F-16: Agilent 10 MHz Reference Connections F-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure F-17: Advantest 10 MHz Reference and Serial I/O Connections F-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure F-18: Performing Agilent E4406A Self–alignment (Calibration) F-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure F-19: Power Meter Detail F-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure F-20: Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter Detail F-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure F-21: Cable Calibration Using HP8921 with PCS Interface F-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure F-22: Cable Calibration Using Advantest R3465 F-35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure H-1: Delta Calibration Setup – Agilent E4432B to HP437 H-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure H-2: Delta Calibration Setup – Agilent E4432B to Agilent E4406A H-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure H-3: Delta Calibration Setup – Advantest R3562 to HP437 H-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents 68P64115A18–1

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

xii Mar 2003

Figure H-4: Delta Calibration Setup – Advantest R3562 to HP437 H-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure H-5: Delta Calibration Setup – Advantest R3562 to R3267 H-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure H-6: Delta Calibration Setup – Agilent 8935 to HP437 H-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure H-7: Delta Calibration Setup – Agilent 8935 to Agilent 8935 H-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure H-8: Delta Calibration Setup – HP8921A to HP437 H-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure H-9: Delta Calibration Setup – HP8921A to HP8921A H-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure H-10: Delta Calibration Setup – R3561L to HP437 H-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure H-11: Delta Calibration Setup – R3561L to R3465 H-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure H-12: TX Calibration Test Setup – Agilent E4406A, Advantest R3267, and Agilent 8935 with

Option 200 or R2K (IS–95A/B and 1X CDMA 2000) H-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure H-13: TX Calibration Test Setup – HP 8921A/600 w/PCS Interface (1.9 GHz),

HP 8921A/600 (800 MHz), and Advantest R3465 (IS–95A/B only) H-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents

68P64115A18–1

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

xiii

Mar 2003

List of Tables

FCC Part 68 Registered Devices xix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 1-1: CDMA LMF Test Equipment Support Table 1-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 1-2: Non–Standard Terms and Abbreviations 1-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 1-3: SCCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Top Shelf) 1-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 1-4: SCCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Bottom Shelf) 1-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 1-5: BTS Sector Configuration 1-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 1-6: Sector Configurations 1-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 2-1: Initial Installation of Boards/Modules 2-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 2-2: Initial Inspection and Setup 2-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 2-3: DC Power System Pre–Power Application Test 2-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 2-4: AC Voltage Measurements 2-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 2-5: Applying Internal AC Power 2-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 2-6: DC Power Application and Tests 2-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 2-7: Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries) 2-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 2-8: Battery Discharge Test 2-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 2-9: DC Power Removal 2-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 2-10: AC Power Removal 2-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 2-11: Apply AC Power to BTS Frame 2-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 2-12: Apply DC Power to BTS Frame 2-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-1: Install LMF using CD ROM 3-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-2: Copying CDF or NECF Files to the LMF Computer 3-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-3: Create HyperTerminal Connection 3-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-4: T1/E1 Span Isolation 3-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-5: Connecting the LMF to the BTS 3-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-6: BTS GUI Login Procedure 3-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-7: BTS CLI Login Procedure 3-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-8: BTS GUI Logout Procedure 3-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-9: BTS CLI Logout Procedure 3-30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-10: Establishing MMI Communication 3-31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-11: Pinging the Processors 3-34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-12: Verify GLI ROM Code Loads 3-38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-13: Download and Enable MGLI and GLI Devices 3-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-14: Download RAM Code and Data to Non–GLI Devices 3-40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-15: Select CSM Clock Source 3-41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-16: Enable CSMs 3-42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-17: Enable MCCs 3-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-18: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification) 3-47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/Verification 3-49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-20: LORAN–C Initialization/Verification 3-53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents 68P64115A18–1

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

xiv Mar 2003

Table 3-21: IS–95A/B–only Test Equipment Interconnection 3-57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-22: CDMA2000 1X/IS–95A/B Test Equipment Interconnection 3-58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-23: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in the Serial Connection Tab 3-74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-24: Selecting Test Equipment Using Auto-Detect 3-75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-25: Test Equipment Calibration 3-76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-26: Test Cabling Calibration using Comm. System Analyzer 3-78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-27: Calibrate TX/Duplexed RX Test Cabling using Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer 3-79

Table 3-28: Calibrating Non–Duplexed RX Test Cabling Using Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer . . .

3-80

Table 3-29: Setting Cable Loss Values 3-81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-30: Setting TX Coupler Loss Values 3-82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-31: BLO bts–#.cal File Array Branch Assignments 3-85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-32: SC4812T Lite bts–#.cal File Array (By BBX/Sector) 3-86 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-33: Set Up Test Equipment for RF Path Calibration 3-88 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-34: Test Patterns with Channels and Gain Settings Used 3-90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-35: All Cal/Audit and TX Calibration Procedure 3-92 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-36: Download BLO 3-94 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-37: BTS TX Path Audit 3-96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-38: Create CAL File 3-97 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-39: RFDS Parameter Settings 3-99 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-40: Definition of Parameters 3-102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-41: Valid NAM Field Ranges 3-103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-42: Set Antenna Map Data 3-104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-43: Set RFDS Configuration Data 3-105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-44: RFDS TSIC Calibration Channel Frequencies 3-106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-45: RFDS Calibration 3-107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-46: Program NAM Procedure 3-108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-47: Alarm Testing Preparation 3-109 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-48: AC Fail Alarm 3-110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-49: Minor Alarm 3-110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 4-1: To Perform Companion Frame Diversity RX FER,

Inter–frame RX Cables Connected

(Set Multi–Channel Preselector to MPC) 4-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 4-2: To Perform Companion Frame Diversity RX FER,

Inter–frame RX Cables Disconnected

(Set Multi–Channel Preselector to EMPC) 4-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 4-3: Set Up Test Equipment – TX Output Verify/Control Tests 4-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 4-4: Additional Diversity RX Test Set–up for Companion Frames 4-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 4-5: All TX/RX ATP Test Procedure 4-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 4-6: All TX ATP Test Procedure 4-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 4-7: All RX ATP Test Procedure 4-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 4-8: Test Spectral Purity Transmit Mask 4-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 4-9: Test Waveform Quality (Rho) 4-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents

68P64115A18–1

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

Mar 2003

Table 4-10: Test Pilot Time Offset 4-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 4-11: Test Code Domain Power/Noise Floor 4-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 4-12: Test FER 4-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 4-13: Generating an ATP Report 4-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 5-1: Copying CAL Files to a Diskette 5-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 5-2: Copying CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSC 5-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 5-3: Remove External Test Equipment 5-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 5-4: Reset BTS Devices and Remote Site Initialization 5-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 5-5: Bring Modules into Service 5-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 5-6: Remove LMF 5-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 5-7: Connect T1 or E1 Spans 5-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 5-8: Check Before Leaving the Site 5-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedures 6-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-2: Force Ethernet LAN A to Active State as Primary LAN 6-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-3: GLI IP Address Setting 6-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-4: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure 6-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-5: Troubleshooting a Communications System Analyzer Communication Failure 6-7 . . . . . . .

Table 6-6: Troubleshooting a Signal Generator Communication Failure 6-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-7: Troubleshooting Code Download Failure 6-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-8: Troubleshooting Data Download Failure 6-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-9: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) Failure 6-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-10: LPA Errors 6-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-11: Troubleshooting BLO Calibration Failure 6-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-12: Troubleshooting Calibration Audit Failure 6-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-13: Troubleshooting Forward Link Failure (BTS Passed Reduced ATP) 6-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-14: Troubleshooting TX Mask Measurement Failure 6-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-15: Troubleshooting Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement Failure 6-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-16: Troubleshooting Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement Failure 6-16 . . . . . . .

Table 6-17: Troubleshooting Multi-FER Failure 6-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-18: CSM Reference (Clock) Sources by GPS Type and Kit Number 6-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-19: No GLI Control Through LMF (All GLIs) 6-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-20: No GLI Control Through Span Line Connection (Both GLIs) 6-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-21: MGLI Control Good – No Control Over Co–located GLI 6-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-22: MGLI Control Good – No Control Over AMR 6-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-23: MGLI Control Good – No Control over Co–located BBXs 6-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-24: BBX Control Good – No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic 6-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-25: No MCC–1X/MCC24E/MCC8E Channel Elements 6-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-26: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module 6-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-27: No DC Input Voltage to any SCCP Shelf Module 6-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-28: TX and RX Signal Routing Problems 6-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-29: RFDS Fault Isolation – All Tests Fail 6-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents 68P64115A18–1

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

xvi Mar 2003

Table 6-30: RFDS Fault Isolation – All Tests Fail on Single Antenna Path 6-27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-31: Troubleshoot Control Link Failure 6-35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-32: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration 6-37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-1: Verification of Test Equipment Used A-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-2: Site Checklist A-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-3: Preliminary Operations A-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A3a: Pre–power Checklist A-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A3b: General Optimization Checklist A-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-4: GPS Receiver Operation A-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-5: LFR Receiver Operation A-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-6: LPA IM Reduction A-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-7: TX BLO Calibration (3–Sector: 1–Carrier and 2–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels) A-9 . . . .

Table A-8: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3–Sector: 2–Carrier Adjacent Channels) A-10 . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-9: TX Antenna VSWR A-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-10: RX Antenna VSWR A-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-11: CDI Alarm Input Verification A-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table B-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn B-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table C-1: SC 4812ET Lite BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix C-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table D-1: BBX Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm) D-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table E-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel E-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table E-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel E-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table F-1: Verify and Change Agilent E4406A GPIB Address F-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table F-2: Verify and Change Agilent E4432B GPIB Address F-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table F-3: Verify and Change Advantest R3267 GPIB Address F-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table F-4: Verify and/or Change Agilent 8935 (formerly HP 8935) GPIB Address F-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table F-5: Verify and/or Change HP 8921A and HP 83236A GPIB Addresses F-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table F-6: Verify and/or Change Advantest R3465 GPIB Address F-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table F-7: Verify and/or Change Motorola CyberTest GPIB Address F-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table F-8: Verify and/or Change HP 437 Power Meter GPIB Address F-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table F-9: Verify and/or Change Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address F-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table F-10: HP 8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections Without Rubidium

Reference F-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table F-11: HP 8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections With Rubidium Reference

F-16

Table F-12: System Connectivity F-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table F-13: Pretest Setup for HP 8921A F-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table F-14: Pretest Setup for Agilent 8935 F-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table F-15: Advantest R3465 Clock Setup F-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table F-16: Pretest Setup for Advantest R346 F-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table F-17: Perform Agilent E4406A Self–alignment (Calibration) F-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table F-18: HP 437 Power Meter Calibration Procedure F-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table F-19: Calibrate Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter F-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents

68P64115A18–1

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

xvii

Mar 2003

Table F-20: Calibrating Test Cable Setup (using the HP PCS Interface) F-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table F-21: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465 F-33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table G-1: Download ROM and RAM Code to Devices G-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table H-1: Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration Procedure H-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table H-2: Advantest R3267 Power Delta Calibration Procedure H-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table H-3: Agilent 8935 Power Delta Calibration Procedure H-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table H-4: HP8921A Power Delta Calibration Procedure H-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table H-5: Advantest Power Delta Calibration Procedure H-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table H-6: In–Service Calibration H-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FCC Requirements 68P64115A18–1

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

xviii Mar 2003

FCC Requirements

Content

This section presents Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

Rules Parts 15 and 68 requirements and compliance information for the

SCt4812T/ET/ET Lite series Radio Frequency Base Transceiver

Stations.

FCC Part 15 Requirements

Part 15.19a(3) – INFORMATION TO USER

NOTE This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation

is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

Part 15.21 – INFORMATION TO USER

CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Motorola

could void your authority to operate the equipment.

15.105(b) – INFORMATION TO USER

NOTE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the

limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable

protection against harmful interference in a residential

installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio

frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance

with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio

communications. However, there is no guarantee that

interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this

equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television

reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment

OFF and ON, the user is encouraged to try to correct the

interference by one or more of the following measures:

SReorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

SIncrease the separation between the equipment and receiver.

SConnect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different

from that to which the receiver is connected.

SConsult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for

help.

FCC Requirements

68P64115A18–1

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

xix

Mar 2003

FCC Part 68 Requirements

This equipment complies with Part 68 of the Federal Communications

Commission (FCC) Rules. A label on the GLI3 board, easily visible

with the board removed, contains the FCC Registration Number for this

equipment. If requested, this information must be provided to the

telephone company.

FCC Part 68 Registered Devices

Device FCC Part 68 ID

Group Line Interface (GLI3) See Note US: IHEXDNANGLI3–1X

Cisco Model 1900–27 Router US: 5B1DDNDN0006

ADC KENTROX Model 537 US: F81USA–31217–DE–N

NOTE

The BTS equipment is always equipped with the GLI3,

< US: IHEXDNANGLI3–1X>, and may be used in conjunction with

one or both of the listed registered CSU devices, or another registered

CSU device not listed above.

The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment,

operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of your T1. If

this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice so that

you can modify your equipment as required to maintain uninterrupted

service.

If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone

company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of

service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone

company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised

of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is

necessary.

If you experience trouble operating this equipment with the T1, please

contact:

Global Customer Network Resolution Center (CNRC)

1501 W. Shure Drive, 3436N

Arlington Heights, Illinois 60004

Phone Number: (847) 632–5390

for repair and/or warranty information. You should not attempt to repair

this equipment yourself. This equipment contains no customer or

user-serviceable parts.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Motorola could

void your authority to operate this equipment.

Foreword 68P64115A18–1

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

xx Mar 2003

Foreword

Scope of manual

This manual is intended for use by cellular telephone system

craftspersons in the day-to-day operation of Motorola cellular system

equipment and ancillary devices.

This manual is not intended to replace the system and equipment

training offered by Motorola, although it can be used to supplement or

enhance the knowledge gained through such training.

Obtaining Manuals

To view, download, order manuals (original or revised), visit the

Motorola Lifecycles Customer web page at http://services.motorola.com,

or contact your Motorola account representative.

If Motorola changes the content of a manual after the original printing

date, Motorola publishes a new version with the same part number but a

different revision character.

Text conventions

The following special paragraphs are used in this manual to point out

information that must be read. This information may be set-off from the

surrounding text, but is always preceded by a bold title in capital letters.

The three categories of these special paragraphs are:

NOTE Presents additional, helpful, non-critical information that you can

use. Bold-text notes indicate information to help you avoid

an undesirable situation or provides additional information

to help you understand a topic or concept.

CAUTION Presents information to identify a situation in which equipment

damage could occur, thus avoiding damage to equipment.

WARNING Presents information to warn you of a potentially hazardous

situation in which there is a possibility of personal injury.

The following typographical conventions are used for the presentation of

software information:

SIn text, sans serif BOLDFACE CAPITAL characters (a type style

without angular strokes: i.e., SERIF versus SANS SERIF) are used to

name a command.

SIn text, typewriter style characters represent prompts and the

system output as displayed on an operator terminal or printer.

SIn command definitions, sans serif boldface characters represent those

parts of the command string that must be entered exactly as shown and

typewriter style characters represent command output responses

as displayed on an operator terminal or printer.

SIn the command format of the command definition, typewriter

style characters represent the command parameters.

Foreword

68P64115A18–1

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

xxi

Mar 2003

Reporting manual errors

To report a documentation error, call the CNRC (Customer Network

Resolution Center) and provide the following information to enable

CNRC to open an MR (Modification Request):

– the document type

– the manual title, part number, and revision character

– the page number(s) with the error

– a detailed description of the error and if possible the proposed solution

Motorola appreciates feedback from the users of our manuals.

Send questions and comments regarding user documentation to the email

address below:

cdma.documentation@motorola.com

Motorola appreciates feedback from the users of our information.

Manual banner definitions

A banner (oversized text on the bottom of the page, for example,

PRELIMINARY) indicates that some information contained in the

manual is not yet approved for general customer use.

24-hour support service

If you have problems regarding the operation of your equipment, please

contact the Customer Network Resolution Center for immediate

assistance. The 24 hour telephone numbers are:

NA CNRC +1–800–433–5202

EMEA CNRC +44– (0) 1793–565444

ASPAC CNRC +86–10–88417733

Japan & Korea CNRC +81–3–5463–3550

LAC CNRC +51–1–212–4020

For further CNRC contact information, contact your Motorola account

representative.

General Safety 68P64115A18–1

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

xxii Mar 2003

General Safety

Remember! . . . Safety

depends on you!!

The following general safety precautions must be observed during all

phases of operation, service, and repair of the equipment described in

this manual. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific

warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design,

manufacture, and intended use of the equipment. Motorola, Inc. assumes

no liability for the customer’s failure to comply with these requirements.

The safety precautions listed below represent warnings of certain dangers

of which we are aware. You, as the user of this product, should follow

these warnings and all other safety precautions necessary for the safe

operation of the equipment in your operating environment.

Ground the instrument

To minimize shock hazard, the equipment chassis and enclosure must be

connected to an electrical ground. If the equipment is supplied with a

three-conductor ac power cable, the power cable must be either plugged

into an approved three-contact electrical outlet or used with a

three-contact to two-contact adapter. The three-contact to two-contact

adapter must have the grounding wire (green) firmly connected to an

electrical ground (safety ground) at the power outlet. The power jack and

mating plug of the power cable must meet International Electrotechnical

Commission (IEC) safety standards.

NOTE Refer to Grounding Guideline for Cellular Radio Installations –

68P81150E62.

Do not operate in an explosive

atmosphere

Do not operate the equipment in the presence of flammable gases or

fumes. Operation of any electrical equipment in such an environment

constitutes a definite safety hazard.

Keep away from live circuits

Operating personnel must:

Snot remove equipment covers. Only Factory Authorized Service

Personnel or other qualified maintenance personnel may remove

equipment covers for internal subassembly, or component

replacement, or any internal adjustment.

Snot replace components with power cable connected. Under certain

conditions, dangerous voltages may exist even with the power cable

removed.

Salways disconnect power and discharge circuits before touching them.

Do not service or adjust alone

Do not attempt internal service or adjustment, unless another person,

capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation, is present.

General Safety

68P64115A18–1

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

xxiii

Mar 2003

Use caution when exposing or

handling the CRT

Breakage of the Cathode–Ray Tube (CRT) causes a high-velocity

scattering of glass fragments (implosion). To prevent CRT implosion,

avoid rough handling or jarring of the equipment. The CRT should be

handled only by qualified maintenance personnel, using approved safety

mask and gloves.

Do not substitute parts or

modify equipment

Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install

substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification of equipment.

Contact Motorola Warranty and Repair for service and repair to ensure

that safety features are maintained.

Dangerous procedure

warnings

Warnings, such as the example below, precede potentially dangerous

procedures throughout this manual. Instructions contained in the

warnings must be followed. You should also employ all other safety

precautions that you deem necessary for the operation of the equipment

in your operating environment.

WARNING Dangerous voltages, capable of causing death, are present in this

equipment. Use extreme caution when handling, testing, and

adjusting.

Revision History 68P64115A18–1

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

xxiv Mar 2003

Revision History

Manual Number

68P64115A18–1

Manual Title

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

Version Information

The following table lists the manual version, date of version, and

remarks on the version. Revision bars printed in page margins (as shown

to the side) identify material which has changed from the previous

release of this publication.

Version

Level Date of Issue Remarks

1Mar 2003 Initial draft t

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

1-1

Chapter 1

Introduction

Optimization Manual Scope and Layout 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

1-2

Optimization Manual Scope and Layout

Manual Scope and Layout

This document provides information pertaining to the optimization and

audit tests of the Motorola 1X SCt4812T–Lite BTS frame. The

following subjects are addressed: preliminary background information;

optimization and alarm/redundancy tests; Acceptance Test Procedures

(ATP) to verify site operation and regulation compliance; site turnover;

troubleshooting.

This optimization procedure consists of a group of task-oriented tests.

Each major test category (Audit, Initial power–up, Calibration, etc.) is

described in chapters which are broken down into multi-page

information “maps.”

Each “map” contains the information necessary to perform the test or

operation. Included are all required input levels, output levels, Local

Maintenance Facility (LMF) application software commands, and test

point identification. Also described are important test process concepts

and equipment operation which should be understood by the operator.

Whenever possible, graphics, flowcharts, or written examples

complement the information or procedural steps.

Assumptions and Prerequisites

This document assumes that the BTS frames and cabling have been

installed per the 1X SC 4812T–Lite BTS Hardware Installation ,

68P64115A16 which covers both the physical “bolt down” of the

SC 3812T–Lite frame and the specific cabling configurations.

Optimization Manual Scope and Layout68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

1-3

Document Composition

This document covers the following major areas:

SIntroduction, consisting of preliminary background information (such

as component and subassembly locations and frame layouts) to be

considered by the Cellular Field Engineer (CFE) before performing

optimization or tests.

SPreliminary Operations, consisting of jumper configuration of BTS

sub–assemblies, pre–power–up tests, initial application of power to

the BTS equipment frames, and initial power–up tests.

SOptimization/Calibration, consisting of procedures for downloading

all BTS processor boards, test equipment set–up, RF path verification,

BLO calibration and calibration audit, and Radio Frequency

Diagnostic System (RFDS) calibration.

SAcceptance Test Procedures (ATP), consisting of automated ATP tests,

executed by the LMF, and used to verify all major transmit (TX) and

receive (RX) performance characteristics on all BTS equipment. This

chapter also covers generating an ATP report.

SPrepare to Leave the Site, discussing site turnover after ATP is

completed.

SBasic Troubleshooting, consisting of procedures to perform when an

ATP fails, as well as when incorrect results are obtained during logon,

test equipment operation, calibration, and Global Positioning System

(GPS) operation.

SAppendices include:

– Data sheets for CFE’s recording at the site

– Pseudorandom Noise (PN) Offset information

– Optimization/ATP matrix

– BBX Gain set point vs BTS output

– CDMA operating frequency programming information

– Manual test setup information

– Downloading ROM and RAM code

– In–service ATP procedures

Purpose of the Optimization 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

1-4

Purpose of the Optimization

Why Optimize?

Proper optimization and calibration ensures that:

SAccurate downlink RF power levels are transmitted from the site.

SAccurate uplink signal strength determinations are made by the site.

What Is Optimization?

Optimization compensates for the site-specific cabling and normal

equipment variations. Site optimization guarantees that the combined

losses of the new cables and the gain/loss characteristics and built-in

tolerances of each BTS frame do not accumulate and cause improper site

operation.

What Happens During Optimization?

Overview – During optimization, the accumulated path loss or gain is

first determined for each RF transmit path in the BTS. These transmit

path loss or gain values are then stored in a database along with RF

receive path default values.

RF path definitions – For definitions of the BTS transmit (TX) and

receive (RX) paths, see “What is Bay Level Offset Calibration?” in the

Bay Level Offset Calibration section of Chapter 3.

RF paths and transceiver optimization – Six of the seven Broad Band

Transceiver (BBX) boards in each CCP shelf are optimized to specific

RX and TX antenna connectors. The seventh BBX board acts in a

redundant capacity for BBX boards 1 through 6, and is optimized to all

antenna connectors. A single optimization value is generated for each

complete path. This eliminates the accumulation of error that would

occur from individually measuring and summing the gain and loss of

each element in the path.

Using RF path gain/loss values – BTS equipment factors in the derived

optimization values internally to adjust transceiver power levels, leaving

only site–specific antenna feedline loss and antenna gain characteristics

to be factored in by the CFE when determining required site Effective

Radiated Power (ERP) output power levels.

When to Optimize68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

1-5

When to Optimize

New Installations

The following operations and optimization/test actions should be

accomplished for a new BTS or frame installation:

1. After the initial site installation, it must be prepared for operation.

This preparation includes verifying hardware installation, initial

power–up, downloading of operating code, verifying GPS operation,

and verifying transmit and receive paths.

2. Next, the optimization is performed. Optimization includes

performance verification and calibration of all transmit and receive

RF paths, and download of accumulated calibration data.

3. A calibration audit of all RF transmit paths may be performed any

time after optimization to verify BTS calibration.

4. After optimization, a series of manual pre–Acceptance Test

Procedure (ATP) verification tests are performed to verify

alarm/redundancy performance.

5. After manual pre–ATP verification tests, an ATP is performed to

verify BTS performance. An ATP is also required to demonstrate

regulation compliance before the site can be placed in service.

Site Expansion

Optimization is required after expansion of a site with additional BTS

frames.

Periodic Optimization

Periodic optimization of a site may also be required, depending on the

requirements of the overall system.

Repaired Sites

Refer to Appendix C for a detailed FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix

outlining the minimum tests that must be performed any time a BTS RF

subassembly or cable associated with an RF path is replaced.

Required Test Equipment and Software 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

1-6

Required Test Equipment and Software

Overview

Test equipment and software described in this section is required for the

optimization procedure. Common assorted tools such as screwdrivers

and frame keys are also needed. Read the owner’s manual for all of the

test equipment to understand its individual operation before using the

tool in the optimization.

Policy

To ensure consistent, reliable, and repeatable optimization test results,

test equipment and software meeting the following technical criteria

should be used to optimize the BTS equipment. Test equipment can, of

course, be substituted with other test equipment models if the equipment

meets the same technical specifications.

NOTE During manual testing, you can, of course, substitute test

equipment with other test equipment models not supported by

the LMF, but those models must meet the same technical

specifications.

It is the responsibility of the customer to account for any measurement

variances and/or additional losses/inaccuracies that can be introduced

as a result of these substitutions. Before beginning optimization or

troubleshooting, make sure that the test equipment needed is on–hand

and operating properly.

Test Equipment Calibration

Optimum system performance and capacity depend on regular equipment

service and calibration prior to BTS optimization. Follow the original

equipment manufacturer (OEM) recommended maintenance and

calibration schedules closely.

Test Cable Calibration

Test cables can make critical differences in optimization accuracy. It is

recommended that cable calibration be run at every BTS with the

complete test equipment set. This method compensates for test cable

insertion loss within the test equipment itself. No other allowance for

test cable insertion loss needs to be made during the performance of

tests.

Another method to account for cable loss is by entering it into the LMF

during the optimization procedure. This method requires accurate test

cable characterization using shop test equipment. Characterized cables

should be tagged with the characterization information, and the

measured losses entered into the LMF before field optimization.

Required Test Equipment and Software68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

1-7

Equipment Warm–up

After arriving at a site, test equipment should be plugged in and turned

on immediately to provide the longest possible time for warm up and

stabilization. The following pieces of test equipment must be warmed up

for a minimum of 60 minutes prior to use for BTS optimization or RFDS

calibration:

SCommunications test set.

SRubidium time base.

SPower meter.

LMF computer and software

LMF Hardware Requirements

An LMF computer platform that meets the following requirements (or

better) is recommended:

SNotebook computer

S266 MHz (32 bit CPU) Pentium processor

SMSr Windows 98R Second Edition (SE) or Windows 2000 operating

system

S4 GB internal hard disk drive

SSVGA 12.1–inch active matrix color display with 1024 x 768

(recommended) or 800 x 600 pixel resolution and capability to display

more than 265 colors

NOTE If 800 x 600 pixel resolution is used, the LMF window must be

maximized after it is displayed.

SMemory requirements:

– Minimum required RAM: 96 MB

– Recommended RAM:

–– 128 MB for Windows 98 SE

–– 256 MB for Windows 2000

S20X CD–ROM drive

S3 1/2 inch floppy drive

S56kbps V.90 modem

SSerial port (COM 1)

SParallel port (LPT 1)

SPCMCIA Ethernet interface card (for example, 3COM Etherlink III)

with a 10BaseT–to–coax adapter

Required Test Equipment and Software 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

1-8

LMF Software

The Local Maintenance Facility (LMF) application program is a

graphical user interface (GUI)–based software tool. This product is

specifically designed to provide cellular communications field personnel

with the capability to support the following CDMA Base Transceiver

Station (BTS) operations:

SInstallation

SMaintenance

SCalibration

SOptimization

Ethernet LAN Transceiver

SPCMCIA Ethernet Adpater + Ethernet UTP Adapter

3COM Model – Etherlink III 3C589B

10BaseT/10Base2 Converter

STransition Engineering Model E–CX–TBT–03 10BaseT/10Base2

Converter (or equivalent)

NOTE Xircom Model PE3–10B2 or its equivalent can also be used to

interface the LMF Ethernet connection to the frame.

Ethernet LAN External In/Out Port Adapter

Trompeter Electronics, Inc., ADBJ20–E1–PL75 or equivalent BNC (F)

to TRB (M) adapter is required if it is necessary to connect the LMF

computer to the LAN external interface triaxial connectors located in the

power entry compartment.

RS–232 to GPIB interface

SNational Instruments GPIB–232–CT with Motorola CGDSEDN04X

RS232 serial cable or equivalent; used to interface the LMF to the test

equipment.

SA standard RS–232 cable can be used with the modifications shown in

Figure 1-1.

NOTE Pin 8 (CTS) does not have to be jumpered/shorted to the others

as it is a driver output. The DTR is already a driver output

signal. The other pins are to receivers. Short pins 7, 1, 4, 6 on

each cable end.

Figure 1-1: Null Modem Cable Detail

GND

RTS

RSD/DCD

DTR

DSR

GND

RTS

RSD/DCD

DTR

DSR

ON BOTH CONNECTORS

SHORT PINS 7, 1, 4, 6

9–PIN D–FEMALE 9–PIN D–FEMALE

Required Test Equipment and Software68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

1-9

Model SLN2006A MMI interface kit

SMotorola Model TRN9666A null modem board. Connectors on

opposite sides of the board must be used as this performs a null

modem transformation between cables. This board can be used for

25–pin to 8–pin, 25–pin to 25–pin, and 10–pin to 10–pin conversions.

SMotorola 30–09786R01 MMI cable or equivalent; used to interface

the LMF computer serial port connection to the Group Line Interface

(GLI), Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM), External Trunked

Interface Board (ETIB), and module debug serial ports.

Communications system analyzer CDMA/analog

Table 1-1: CDMA LMF Test Equipment Support Table

Item Description Test Capability

Test Sets

Hewlett Packard, model

HP 8921A (with 83203B) Communications analyzer (includes 83203B

CDMA interface option) IS–95A/B only

Motorola CyberTest Communications analyzer IS–95A/B only

Advantest R3465 (with 3561L) Communications analyzer (with 3561 CDMA

option) IS–95A/B only

Agilent E4406A (with E4432B) Communications analyzer (with Generator) IS–95A/B and

CDMA 2000 testing

Advantest R3267 Analyzer (with

R3562) Communciations Analyzer with Advantest

R3562 Generator IS–95A/B and

CDMA 2000 testing

Agilent 8935 series E6380A

(formerly HP 8935) with option

200 or R2K

Communications test set IS–95A/B and

CDMA 2000 testing

Power Meters

Gigatronix 8541C Power meter

HP437B (with HP8481A sensor) Power meter with sensor – capable of measuring –30 dBm to 20 dBm

A combination of test equipment supported by the LMF may also be

used during optimization and testing of the RF communications portion

of BTS equipment when the communications system analyzer does not

perform all of the following functions:

SFrequency counter

SDeviation meter

SRF power meter (average and code domain)

SRF signal generator (capable of DSAT/CDMA modulation)

SAudio signal generator

SAC voltmeter (with 600–ohm balanced audio input and high

impedance input mode)

SNoise measurement meter

SC–Message filter

SSpectrum analyzer

SCDMA code domain analyzer

Required Test Equipment and Software 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

1-10

GPIB cables

Hewlett Packard 10833A or equivalent; one or two meters long, used to

interconnect test equipment and LMF computer.

Timing reference cables

STwo Huber & Suhner 16MCX/11BNC/K02252D or equivalent; right

angle MCX–male to standard BNC–male RG316 cables; 10 ft. long

are required to interconnect the communications system analyzer to

SGLN4132A and SGLN1145A CSM board timing references

STwo BNC–male to BNC–male RG316 cables; 3 meters (10 feet) long,

used to interconnect the communications system analyzer to

SGLN4132B and SGLN1145B (and later) CSM front panel timing

references in the RF Modem Frame

Digital multimeter

Fluke Model 8062A with Y8134 test lead kit or equivalent; used for

precision DC and AC measurements to four decimal places.

Directional coupler

Narda Model 3020A 20 dB coupler terminated with two Narda Model

375BN–M loads, or equivalent.

RF attenuators

S20 dB Fixed attenuator, 20 Watt (Narda 768–20), used in conjunction

with calibration of test cables or during general troubleshooting

procedures.

S10 dB Fixed attenuator, 20 Watt (Narda 768–10), for cable calibration

with a Cybertest CDMA analyzer.

Clamp–on DC current probe

Amprobe CT600, or equivalent, 600 A capability with jaw size which

accommodates 2/0 cable. Used with the DMM for back–up battery

charging testing.

Miscellaneous RF adapters, loads, etc.

As required to interface test cables and BTS equipment and for various

test setups. Should include at least (2) 50 Ohm loads (type N) for

calibration and (1) RF short.

RF load

100W non–radiating RF load used (as required) to provide dummy RF

loading during BTS transmit tests.

High–impedance conductive wrist strap

Motorola Model 42–80385A59; used to prevent damage from ESD when

handling or working with modules.

Required Test Equipment and Software68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

1-11

Driver bit for tamper–resistant fasteners

Star fastener tamper–resistant insert bit set, Grainger 5F530 or

equivalent, to remove tamper–resistant fasteners securing the frame rear

access cover.

Optional Equipment

This section provides a list of additional equipment that might be

required during maintenance and troubleshooting operations.

NOTE Not all optional equipment specified in this section will be

supported by the LMF in automated tests.

Duplexer

Filtronics Low IM Duplexer (Cm035–f2) or equivalent; used during

Spectral Purity Receive band noise tests.

Frequency counter

Stanford Research Systems SR620 or equivalent; used if direct

measurement of the 3 MHz or 19.6608 MHz references is required.

Spectrum analyzer

Spectrum Analyzer (HP8594E with CDMA personality card) or

equivalent; required for manual tests other than standard Receive band

spectral purity tests performed by the LMF.

LAN tester

Model NETcat 800 LAN troubleshooter (or equivalent); used to

supplement LAN tests using the ohm meter.

Span line (T1/E1) verification equipment

As required for the local application.

RF test cable (if not provided with test equipment)

Motorola Model TKN8231A; used to connect test equipment to the BTS

transmitter output during optimization or during general troubleshooting

procedures.

Oscilloscope

Tektronics Model 2445 or equivalent; used for waveform viewing,

timing, and measurements, or during general troubleshooting procedures.

2–way splitter

Mini–Circuits Model ZFSC–2–2500 or equivalent; used to provide the

diversity receive input to the BTS.

Required Test Equipment and Software 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

1-12

CDMA subscriber mobile or portable radiotelephone

Safco Model 2136–150 with power supply and antenna; used to provide

test transmission and reception during BTS maintenance and

troubleshooting. Do not substitute other models that do not feature

special test modes. Two radios will be required for system and

drive–around testing after optimization and BTS ATP are completed.

RF circulator

Circulator (FERROCOM 5809866C01) or equivalent; can substitute for

a duplexer during Receive sensitivity Frame Erasure Rate (FER) testing

in conjunction with Safco CDMA mobile.

High stability 10 MHz rubidium standard

Stanford Research Systems SR625 or equivalent. Required for CSM and

Low Frequency Receiver (LFR)/High Stability Oscillator (HSO)

frequency verification.

Required Documents and Related Publications68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

1-13

Required Documents and Related Publications

Required Documents

The following documents are required to perform optimization of the

cell site equipment:

SSite Document (generated by Motorola Systems Engineering), which

includes:

– General site information

– Floor plan

– RF power levels

– Frequency plan (includes Site PN and operating frequencies)

– Channel allocation (paging, traffic, etc.)

– Board placement

– Site wiring list

– CDF or NECF files (bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf or bts–#.necf and

cbsc–#.necf)

SDemarcation Document (Scope of Work Agreement)

SEquipment manuals for non-Motorola test equipment

Related Publications

Additional, detailed information about the installation, operation, and

maintenance of the 1X SCt4812T–Lite BTS and its components is

included in the following publications:

SCDMA RFDS User’s Guide; 68P64114A51

SLMF Help function on–line documentation

SLMF CLI Reference; 68P09253A56

SCDMA RFDS Hardware Installation; 68P64113A93

S1X SC 4812T–Lite BTS Hardware Installation ; 68P64115A16

S1X SC 4812T–Lite BTS FRU Guide ; 68P64115A17

SSC4812T/T–Lite/ET/ET Lite Troubleshooting; 68P09253A65

SCellular Glossary of Terms and Acronyms; 68P09213A95

Terms and Abbreviations 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

1-14

Terms and Abbreviations

Standard and Non–standard Terms and Abbreviations

Standard terms and abbreviations used in this manual are defined in

Cellular Glossary of Terms and Acronyms; 68P09213A95. Any

non–standard terms or abbreviations included in this manual are listed in

Table 1-2.

Table 1-2: Non–Standard Terms and Abbreviations

Term or

Abbreviation Definition

1X One of two bandwidths currently defined in the IS–2000 CDMA specification, which

extends the capability of the IS–95A and B specifications. 1X bandwidth provides

wireless packet voice and data transmission capability at up to 144 Mbps.

BBX–1X Broad Band Transceiver, 1X. Third generation BBX card with CDMA2000 1X packet as

well as IS–95A/B capability.

BBX2 Broadband Transceiver, 2nd Generation supports IS–95A/B

BBXR Redundant BBX for a CCP shelf or cage.

CCD Clock Combining and Distribution. CCP shelf module which accepts timing signals from

the active source and distributes them to other CCP shelf modules.

CIO Combiner Input/Output

companion frame A BTS frame configured to operate at the same site with another companion frame.

Companion frames may share antenna signals, but are not inter–connected on the same

LAN. Companion frames are managed as separate BTSs in the Base Station System

(BSS).

DBPF Dual Bandpass Filter

DBM Debug Monitor

DLM DownLoad Manager. Software application resident on the GLI card which permits

download of software upgrades from the Centralized Base Station Controller (CBSC) to

BTSs without the need for a site visit.

DMAC Digital Metering, Alarm, Control. Part of the Meter Alarm Panel (MAP) which provides

control of and status information for the AC power rectifiers as well as back–up battery

monitoring and test capability. Term is used interchangeably with MAP (see below).

DPLL Digital Phase–Locked Loop

DRDC Duplexer, Receive Filter, Dual Directional Coupler. Provides duplexing of BTS transmit

and receive signals to a single antenna and antenna signal sampling in either the forward

(transmit) or reflected (receive) direction for use by an RF Diagnostic Subsystem

(RFDS).

EMPC Expansion Multi–coupler Preselector Card. BTS expansion frame MPC module which is

used to receive, amplify, and distribute RX signals from the starter frame MPC.

GLI2 Group Line Interface card, second generation

HSO High Stability Oscillator. Module providing backup timing source for a BTS when the

timing signal from the GPS or Remote GPS module is unavailable.

HSO2 HSO card, second generation

. . . continued on next page

Terms and Abbreviations68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

1-15

Table 1-2: Non–Standard Terms and Abbreviations

Term or

Abbreviation Definition

HSOX HSO Expansion. Module used in a BTS expansion frame to interface with the starter

frame HSO or LFR and distribute the timing signals to the expansion frame CSM

modules.

ISC In–Service Calibration. Technique for performing calibration sector by sector on a BTS

to avoid completely removing the site from service.

LPAC Linear Power Amplifier Controller

LFR2 Low Frequency Receiver, second generation. Low–cost LFR card with capability to

distribute synchronization signals to multiple RF modem frames.

MAP Meter Alarm Panel. SC4812ET Lite Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) which contains the

functions of both the Temperature Compensation Panel (TCP) and the DMAC. Term is

used interchangeably with DMAC.

MCC8E Multichannel CDMA Card supporting 8 IS–95A/B channels.

MCC24E Multichannel CDMA Card supporting 24 IS–95A/B channels.

MCC–1X Multichannel CDMA Card supporting 16 or 48 CDMA2000 1X or (with Software

Release 2.16.0.84.3 and higher) IS–95A/B channels.

MPC Multi–coupler Preselector Card. BTS CCP shelf module used to amplify and distribute

RX signals to BBX modules.

NECB Network Element Configuration Baseline

NECF Network Element Configuration File

NECJ Network Element Configuration Journal

OLF Object List File. File containing a list of the ROM and RAM code versions which should

be operating on every device installed in a BTS. The file is resident on the Central Base

Station Controller (CBSC) Mobility Manager (MM) and is passed to the GLI after a

DLM job is invoked. The GLI uses the OLF to determine which devices require code

download to meet the OLF–specified version.

PDA Power Distribution Assembly. Assembly in an SC4812ET Lite BTS providing internal

DC power distribution and circuit protection.

RFMF RF Modem Frame

RGD Remote Global Positioning System (GPS) Distribution. Module which provides

distribution of digital timing information to up to four BTS RF modem frames (RFMFs)

from a single Remote GPS receiver.

RGPS Remote Global Positioning System. GPS receiver and signal distribution subsystem

which provides digital timing information for up to four BTS RFMFs at a cell site.

RGPS expansion

primary frame BTS frame where the RGD is located and which serves as the distribution point for

RGPS digital timing signals to other (secondary) BTS frames at a cell site.

RGPS expansion

secondary frame BTS frame which receives RGPS digital timing signals distributed from the primary

RGPS expansion frame at a cell site.

RHSO Remote High–Stability Oscillator. Subsystem which generates and distributes

synchronization signals from a single HSO to up to four RF modem frames.

. . . continued on next page

Terms and Abbreviations 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

1-16

Table 1-2: Non–Standard Terms and Abbreviations

Term or

Abbreviation Definition

SCCP Small CDMA Channel Processor. The type of CCP shelf used in the SC4812ET Lite

BTS.

TCP Temperature Compensation Panel. A function of the SC4812ET Lite MAP which

provides the capability to adjust DC voltage output of the rectifiers to compensate for

variations resulting from temperature changes.

TRDC Transmit & Receive Dual Directional Coupler (Non–duplexed, Receive Filter). TRDCs

contains separate transmit and receive paths and bandpass filters which are not connected

electrically. Transmit and receive antenna signals are not duplexed and must be handled

by separate antennas. Each RF path contains a dual directional coupler on the antenna

port which allows sampling of antenna signals in the forward (transmit) and reflected

(receive) directions for use by an RFDS.

BTS Equipment Identification68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

1-17

BTS Equipment Identification

Equipment Overview

The 1X SCt4812T–Lite BTS frame consists of a single cabinet

containing RF and power amplifier components. The BTS may be

powered powered by:

S220 Vac (rectified internally to +27 Vdc)

S–48 Vdc (power converted internally to +27Vdc)

S+27 Vdc

Each frame can support up to two carriers in a 3–sector configuration.

Six–sector operation is not supported with any SC4812T Lite

configuration.

Figure 1-2 illustrates the external features of the BTS frame, the single

major component of the Motorola SC4812T Lite. The frame cabinet is

identical for starter and expansion frames except for the I/O interconnect

plate.

Frame Configurations

The SC4812T Lite is available in starter and expansion frame

configurations. Following are brief descriptions of each.

Starter frame configuration supports one or two carriers, each with

separate antenna sets. It can operate as a stand–alone BTS, or can be

modified in the field to the expansion frame configuration.

Expansion Frame configuration supports one or two carriers using 2:1

TX combiners and a single antenna set for the frame. It operates with an

SC4812T Lite starter frame which has its own antennas and different

carriers. Expansion frames share RX signals to provide diversity RX for

the opposite frame. Expansion frames allow equipping a single SC4812T

Lite site with up to four carriers.

Logical BTS

The BTS software implements the logical BTS capability. Previously, all

BTS frames co–located at a single site had to be identified in the

network with separate and distinct BTS ID numbers. In the Logical BTS

feature, all frames located at a single BTS site are identified with unique

Frame ID numbers (Frame ID Numbers 1, 101, 201, 301) under a single

(site) BTS ID number. A logical BTS can consist of up to four

SC 4812T frames.When the LMF is connected to frame 1 of a logical

BTS, you can access all devices in all of the frames that make up the

logical BTS. A logical BTS requires a CDF/NECF file that includes

equipage information for all of the logical BTS frames and their devices

and a CBSC file that includes channel data for all of the logical BTS

frames.

BTS Equipment Identification 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

1-18

Logical BTS Numbering

The first frame of a logical BTS has a –1 suffix (e.g., BTS–812–1).

Other frames of the logical BTS are numbered with suffixes, –101, –201,

and –301 (e. g. BTS–812–201). When you log into a BTS, a FRAME

tab is displayed for each frame. If there is only one frame for the BTS,

there is only one tab (e.g., FRAME–282–1) for BTS–282. If a logical

BTS has more than one frame, there is a separate FRAME tab for each

frame (e.g. FRAME–438–1, FRAME–438–101, and FRAME–438–201

for a BTS–438 that has three frames). If an RFDS is included in the

CDF/NECF file, an RFDS tab (e.g., RFDS–438–1) is displayed.

Actions (e.g., ATP tests) can be initiated for selected devices in one or

more frames of a logical BTS. Refer to the Select devices help screen for

information on how to select devices.

SCCP Shelf Card/Module Device ID Numbers

All cards/modules/boards in the frames at a single site, assigned to a

single BTS number, are also identified with unique Device ID numbers

dependent upon the Frame ID number in which they are located. Refer to

Table 1-3 and Table 1-4 and Figure 1-4 for specific device ID numbers.

Table 1-3: SCCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Top Shelf)

Card/Module ID Number (Left to Right)

Frame

#Power

(PS–1) Power

(PS–2) AMR–1 GLI2–1 MCC BBX BBX–R

(Optional) MPC/

EMPC–1

1 – – 1 1 1 2 1 2 3 R1 –

101 – – 101 101 101 102 101 102 103 R101 –

201 – – 201 201 201 202 201 202 203 R201 –

301 – – 301 301 301 302 301 302 303 R301 –

Table 1-4: SCCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Bottom Shelf)

Card/Module ID Number (Left to Right)

Frame

# HSO/

LFR CSM –1 CSM –2 CCD A CCD B AMR–2 GLI2–2 MCC BBX SW MPC/

EMPC–2

1 – 1 2 – – – 2 2 3 4 4 5 6 – –

101 –101 102 – – – 102 102 103 104 104 105 106 – –

201 –201 202 – – – 202 202 203 204 204 205 206 – –

301 –301 302 – – – 302 302 303 304 304 305 306 – –

BTS Equipment Identification68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

1-19

Figure 1-2: 1X SCt4812T–Lite BTS Frame

For clarity, doors are not shown.

Power Supply

Modules

SCCP

Fan Module

ti-CDMA-WP-00213-v01-ildoc-ftw

Power

Breaker

Panel

Amplifiers

I/O Interconnect

Plate

BTS Equipment Identification 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

1-20

Internal Assemblies and FRUs

The BTS frame houses the fan modules, Small CDMA Channel

Processor (SCCP) shelf, RF Power Amplifier modules, PA trunking

modules, 2:1 combiners.

RF filtering includes: DRF – Duplexers with TX Filter, RX Filter, and

Diversity RX Filter and TRF – Non-Duplexed TX Filter, RX Filter, and

Diversity RX Filter.

Power system components include an AC Power Input/Filter, DC Filters,

+27 Vdc Power Distribution Assembly (PDA).

Figure 1-2 and Figure 1-3 show the location of the internal assemblies

and Field Replaceable Units (FRU). A brief description of each item is

found in the following paragraphs.

Figure 1-3: I/O Interconnect Plate

FRONT

SITE I/O

LAN

CONNECTIONS

GPS IN

HSO/LFR

RF FILTERING

POWER INPUT/

DC FILTER

ETHERNET ROUTER (IF USED;

OTHERWISE, FILLER PLATE)

EXP FILLER

PLATE

REAR

SPAN I/O

ti-CDMA-WP-00214-v01-ildoc-ftw

ALARM

CONNECTORS

POWER INPUT/

AC FILTER

FILLER PLATE

DC Power Distribution Assembly (PDA)

Both rectifier output voltage and back–up battery voltage are routed to

the PDA (Figure 1-3) where they are combined into system DC bus

voltage. The PDA provides distribution of DC power and system DC

bus protection from the loads with MAIN BREAKER and the smaller

post–distribution circuit breakers. MAIN BREAKER permits removal of

all frame loading from the bus. The 13 post–distribution circuit breakers

permit removal of individual loads.

BTS Equipment Identification68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

1-21

Filter/Combiner Shelf (Bandpass Filters or 2:1

Combiners)

The filter/combiner shelf (Figure 1-3) holds the transmit bandpass filters

or 2:1 combiners, depending on system configuration.

Span I/O Board

The span I/O board (Figure 1-3) provides the span line interface to the

SCCP backplane.

Small CDMA Channel Processor (SCCP) Shelf

The SCCP shelf has provisions for the following types and quantities of

modules (Figure 1-3 and Figure 1-4):

SAlarm Monitoring and Reporting (AMR) cards (2)

SBroad Band Transceiver, second generation or 1X, (BBX2 or

BBX–1X) cards, primary (6)

SBBX2 or BBX–1X card, redundant (1)

SCDMA Clock Distribution (CCD) cards (2)

SClock Synchronization Manager (CSM) on two cards (one with GPS

receiver, if ordered)

SCombiner Input/Output (CIO) card (1)

SFan modules (2)

SFiller panel (as required)

SGroup Line Interface, second generation, (GLI2) cards (2)

SHigh Stability Oscillator (HSO)/Low Frequency Receiver (LFR) card

(Optional) (1)

SMulti–coupler Preselector Cards (MPC) (2 per starter frame; 1 per

companion frame)

SExpansion Multi–coupler Preselector Card (EMPC) (1 per companion

frame)

SMulti–Channel CDMA (MCC8E, MCC24E, or MCC–1X) cards (4)

SPower supply cards (2)

SSwitch card (1)

BTS Equipment Identification 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

1-22

Figure 1-4: SCCP Shelf

ti-CDMA-WP-00222-v01-ildoc-ftw REF

SC 4812T Lite Cabinet

MPC/EMPC

CSM

Power Supply

MPC/EMPC

CSM

CCD–1CCD–2

AMR

HSO

AMR

GLI GLI

MCC

BBX

SWITCH

19mm Filler Panel

BBX

CIO

CCD CARD(S)

(LOCATED BEHIND FILLER PANEL)

SCCP SHELF

FILLER POWER 1 POWER 2

HSO/LFR CSM 1 CSM 2 CCD AMR GLI

1 2

3 4

MCC

1 2 3

4 5 6

BBX R1

SWITCH

MPC

2:1 Combiners

In the SC4812T Lite BTS, one 2:1 combiner is used per sector to

combine the trunked LPA–amplified TX signals for two carriers into one

signal for input to the applicable sector DRDC or TRDC.

BTS Equipment Identification68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

1-23

Transmit & receive, non–duplexed, Receive filter, Dual

Directional Coupler (TRF)

TRFs provide separate, bandpass–filtered sector transmit and receive

paths. When TRFs are used, separate transmit and receive antennas are

required for each sector. As with DRFs, dual directional couplers for

each antenna path are incorporated in TRFs to permit signal monitoring

by the RFDS.

Figure 1-5: DRF and TRF Details

DRF

TRF

SC4812ETL0005–4

BTS

CPLD

ANT

CPLD

TX BTS

CPLD

TX ANT

CPLD

RX ANT

CPLD

RX BTS

CPLD

ANTENNA

DUPLEXED

TX & RX ANTENNA

BTS Equipment Identification 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

1-24

SCCP Cage Configuration and 1X Devices

SC 4812T Lite frames have one SCCP cage which will support up to

four MCC cards and six BBX cards.

MCC Cards

A BTS may be configured with a mix of MCC–8E, MCC–24E, and

MCC–1X cards. Any SCCP cage MCC card slot will support any of the

three MCC types. For 1X capability under R16.0, at least one MCC card

must be an MCC–1X which can be installed in any MCC card slot. In a

BSS operating with Software Release 2.16.0.84.3 and higher, MCC–1X

cards will support IS–95A and B traffic as well as CDMA2000 1X.

When operating with Software Release 2.16.0.5x.x, the MCC–1X cards

do not support IS–95A/B operation. For additional software release

compatibility and capability information, contact the local Motorola

account team.

BBX Cards

Up to six BBX cards of mixed BBX2s and BBX–1Xs can also be

supported. SCCP cage BBX2 card slots 1 through 6 are carrier– and

sector–dependent. As a result, the BBX slots dedicated to the sectors for

one carrier should be populated with the same type of cards. Refer to

Table 1-6 for BBX card slot carrier and sector correlations.

The SCCP cage R1 card slot is dedicated to the redundant BBX. This

slot will support either a BBX2 or a BBX–1X. If a cage has BBX–1X

carriers, the redundant BBX (BBXR) must be a BBX–1X card to provide

1X redundancy.

BBX–1X and BBX2 Interchangeability

In a BSS operating with R16.0 software, BBX–1X cards can be used as

direct replacements for BBX2 cards; however, different types of BBXs

should not be mixed on the same carrier. Therefore, if a BBX2 card is

replaced with a BBX–1X, all remaining BBX2 cards for the carrier

supported by the replaced card must also be replaced with BBX–1X

cards.

BTS Sector Configurations68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

1-25

BTS Sector Configurations

There are a number of ways to configure the BTS frame. Table 1-5

outlines the basic requirements. For more detailed information also see

Table 1-6, Figure 1-6 and Figure 1-7. Bandpass filters are used for

single–carrier configurations and two–carrier systems when carriers are

either adjacent or not adjacent

Table 1-5: BTS Sector Configuration

Number of

Carriers Number

of Sectors Channel Spacing Filter Requirements

1 3 N/A Bandpass Filter or 2:1 Combiner

2 3 Adjacent or Non–adjacent Bandpass Filter

2 3 Non–adjacent 2:1 Combiner

The matrix in Table 1-6 shows the correlation between the various sector

configurations and BBX cards.

BTS Sector Configurations 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

1-26

Table 1-6: Sector Configurations

Configuration Description

3–Sector / 1 Carrier

The configuration below maps RX and TX with bandpass filters for a 3–sector/1–carrier frame.

ANT 1A ANT 2A ANT 3A ANT 1B ANT 2B ANT 3B

TX1 / RX1A TX2 / RX2A TX3 / RX3A RX1B RX2B RX3B Carrier #

BBX–1 BBX–2 BBX–3 BBX–1

(diversity RX) BBX–2

(diversity RX) BBX–3

(diversity RX) 1

3–Sector / 1 Carrier

The configuration below maps RX and TX with 2:1 combiners for 3–sector/1–carrier frames in

companion configuration.

ANT 1A ANT 2A ANT 3A ANT 1B ANT 2B ANT 3B

TX1 / RX1A TX2 / RX2A TX3 / RX3A Carrier #

BBX–1 BBX–2 BBX–3 1

NOTE

Diversity RX (RX1B, 2B, and 3B) is received from the opposite companion frame through RX

EXPANSION connectors 1B, 2B, and 3B.

Diversity RX is provided to the opposite companion frame from antenna connectors 1A, 2A, and 3A

through RX EXPANSION connectors 1A, 2A, and 3A.

3–Sector / 2–ADJACENT or 2–NON–ADJACENT Carriers

The configuration below maps RX and TX with bandpass filters for 3–sectors/2–carriers for both

adjacent and non–adjacent channels.

ANT 1A ANT 2A ANT 3A ANT 1B ANT 2B ANT 3B

3TX1 / RX1A TX2 / RX2A TX3 / RX3A TX4 / RX1B TX5 / RX2B TX6 / RX3B Carrier #

BBX–1 BBX–2 BBX–3 BBX–1

(diversity RX) BBX–2

(diversity RX) BBX–3

(diversity RX) 1

BBX–4

(RX) BBX–5

(RX) BBX–6

(RX) BBX–4

(TX & diversity

RX)

BBX–5

(TX & diversity

RX)

BBX–6

(TX & diversity

RX)

3–Sector / 2–NON–ADJACENT Carriers

The configuration below maps RX and TX with 2:1 combiners for 3–sectors/2–carriers for

non–adjacent channels for frames in companion configuration.

ANT 1A ANT 2A ANT 3A ANT 1B ANT 2B ANT 3B

TX1 & 4 /

RX1A & 4A TX2 & 5 /

RX2A & 5A TX3 & 6 /

RX3A & 6A Carrier #

BBX–1 BBX–2 BBX–3 1

BBX–4 BBX–5 BBX–6 2

NOTE

Diversity RX (RX1B, 2B, 3B and RX4B, 5B, 6B) is received from the opposite companion frame

through RX EXPANSION connectors 1B, 2B, and 3B (see NO TAG or NO TAG).

Diversity RX is provided to the opposite companion frame from antenna connectors 1A, 2A, and 3A

through RX EXPANSION connectors 1A, 2A, and 3A.

BTS Sector Configurations68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

1-27

Figure 1-6: SC4812T Lite Stand–alone PA Configuration with Bandpass Filters

NOTE See Table 1-6 Configuration Numbers 1 and 3.

3–Sector

Bandpass Filters

CARRIER 1

SECTOR 1, 2, 3

CARRIER 2

SECTOR 1, 2, 3

Figure 1-7: SC4812T Lite Companion Frame LPA Configuration with 2:1 Combiners

NOTE See Table 1-6 Configuration Numbers 2 and 4.

SC4812ETL0011–4

3–Sector

2:1 Combiners

CARRIER 1

SECTOR 1, 2, 3

CARRIER 2

SECTOR 1, 2, 3

BTS Sector Configurations 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

1-28

Notes

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

2-1

Chapter 2

Preliminary Operations

Preliminary Operations: Overview 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

2-2

Preliminary Operations: Overview

Introduction

This section first verifies proper frame equipage against the site-specific

documentation supplied for each BTS application. This includes

verifying module placement, jumper, and dual in–line package (DIP)

switch settings. Next, pre-power up and initial power-up procedures are

presented. Finally, power–down and normal power–up procedures are

covered.

Cell–site Types

Sites are configured as omni or up to 3–sectors – one or two carriers.

Each type has unique characteristics and must be optimized accordingly.

CDF/NECF

The Configuration Data File (CDF) or Network Element Configuration

File (NECF) contains site type and equipage data information and passes

it directly to the LMF during optimization. The number of modem

frames, number and types of BBX and MCC boards, and linear power

amplifier assignments are some of the equipage data included in the

CDF/NECF.

NOTE Be sure that the correct bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.cdf

files are used for the BTS. These should be the CDF/NECF files

that are provided for the BTS by the CBSC. Failure to use the

correct CDF/NECF files can cause system errors. Failure to use

the correct CDF/NECF files to log into a live (traffic

carrying) site can shut down the site.

Site Equipage Verification

Review the site documentation. Match the site engineering equipage data

to the actual boards and modules shipped to the site. Physically inspect

and verify the equipment provided for the frame.

CAUTION Always wear an approved anti–static wrist strap while handling

any circuit card/module to prevent damage by ESD. After

removal, the card/module should be placed on a conductive

surface or back into the anti–static packaging in which it was

shipped.

Preliminary Operations: Overview68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

2-3

Initial Installation of Boards/Modules

Table 2-1: Initial Installation of Boards/Modules

Step Action

1Refer to the site documentation and, if it was not previously done, slide all boards and modules into

the appropriate shelves as required. DO NOT SEAT the boards and modules at this time.

NOTE

On 800 MHz systems, the Switch Card has a configuration switch that must match the site

configuration (see Figure 2-1).

2As the actual site hardware is installed, record the serial number of each module on a “Serial Number

Checklist” in the site logbook.

Figure 2-1: 800 MHz Configuration Switch Card

NOTE Configuration Switch (shown in Figure 2-1) is a feature on the

newer versions of the 800 Mhz switch card (some earlier cards

do not have the switch). Configuration shown is for 3 Sector

BTS. Switch 1 chooses BTS or MF. Switch 4 chooses 3–sector

or 6 sector. Switches 2 and 3 are not used.

ti-CDMA-WP-00228-v01-ildoc-ftw REF

Switch Card

1234

BTS

3 Sector

6 Sector

SHIELDS

Configuration

Switch

Preliminary Operations: Overview 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

2-4

Setting Frame SCCP Configuration Switch

The backplane configuration switch is located behind the frame rear

access panel. It must be set for the frame type as shown in Figure 2-2.

The switch setting must be verified and set before power is applied to the

BTS equipment.

Figure 2-2: Backplane DIP Switch Settings

OFF

STARTER

FRAME

SETTING

OFF

EXPANSION

FRAME 1

SETTING

BOTTOM / TOP

RIGHT / LEFT

MODEM_FRAME_ID_1

MODEM_FRAME_ID_0

BOTTOM / TOP

RIGHT / LEFT

MODEM_FRAME_ID_1

MODEM_FRAME_ID_0

REAR ACCESS

PANEL

T–27 BUTTON HEAD OR

T–30 PAN HEAD

TAMPER–RESISTANT

FASTENER (14)

Rear of

SC–4812T–Lite

Ethernet LAN68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

2-5

Ethernet LAN

Ethernet LAN Termination

For proper operation, each end of the primary and redundant BTS

Ethernet Local Area Networks (LAN) must be terminated with a

50–ohm load. For a BTS consisting of a stand–alone or an expansion

frame, this is done by placing 50–ohm triaxial terminations on the LAN

A and B external IN and OUT connectors.

Check the LAN A and B external IN and OUT connectors on the I/O

plate of each frame (see Figure 2-3) and be sure terminations are

installed on all the uncabled external LAN connectors.

Figure 2-3: External Ethernet LAN Connectors

FRONT

LAN B IN

CONNECTION

REAR

ti-CDMA-WP-00214-v01-ildoc-ftw REF

LAN B OUT

CONNECTION

LAN A OUT

CONNECTION

LAN A IN

CONNECTION

Pre-Initial Power-up Tests 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

2-6

Pre-Initial Power-up Tests

Introduction

The following information is used to check for any electrical short

circuits and to verify the operation and tolerances of each frame at the

site before applying power for the first time. It contains instructional

information on the proper initial power up procedures for the SC4812T

Lite stand–alone and expansion frames for both the North American

version and the International version. If directions are different for either

version, they are called out within the procedure. Please pay attention to

all cautions and warning statements in order to prevent accidental injury

to personnel.

NOTE Unless otherwise noted, all procedures in this section are to be

followed for each frame at a site.

Required Tools

The following tools are used in the procedures.

SClamp–on DC current probe (600 A capability with jaw size to

accommodate 2/0 cable).

SDigital Multimeter (DMM) with standard 2mm (.080”) tip probes

SHot Air Gun – (optional for part of the Alarm Verification)

Cabling Inspection

Using the site-specific documentation generated by Motorola Systems

Engineering, verify that the following cable systems are properly

connected:

SReceive RF cabling – up to six RX cables

STransmit RF cabling – up to six TX cables

SFor expansion frame installations, inter–frame RX diversity cabling –

six RX cables

NOTE For DC power applications (+27 V):

SThe positive power cable is red.

SThe negative power cable is black. (The black power cable is

at ground potential.)

Initial Inspection and Setup

Table 2-2: Initial Inspection and Setup

Step Action

1Be sure that the facility circuit breaker controlling external AC power supplied to the frame is set to

OFF.

2Verify that the external AC power supply is correctly connected to the ACLC input by performing the

procedure in Table 2-4.

DC Power System Pre-power Application Test

Before applying any power to the BTS frame, follow the procedure in

Table 2-3 to verify there are no shorts in the DC power distribution

system.

Pre-Initial Power-up Tests68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

2-7

NOTE The procedure in Table 2-3 is required only on initial frame

power–up or following maintenance when any major power

components (e.g., ACLC, DC PDA, Meter Alarm Panel) were

replaced or internal DC power cables were disconnected.

Table 2-3: DC Power System Pre–Power Application Test

Step Action

1Physically verify all AC power to the BTS is OFF and all DC PDA circuit breakers (Figure 2-4) are

set to OFF (pulled out).

2On the DC PDA, set the MAIN BREAKER to the ON position by pushing it in. Resistance between

the MAP (–) VOLT TEST POINT and the (–) AMP TEST POINT should measure between 300 Ω.

minimum 900 Ω. maximum.

3Before proceeding, be sure the SCCP shelf power/converter modules PS1 and PS2 are correct by

verifying that the locking/retracting tabs appear as follows:

– (in +27 volt systems)

! CAUTION

Using the incorrect type of power/converter modules will damage the module, the SCCP shelf, and

other modules installed in the SCCP shelf.

4NOTE

In the following steps, if the DMM reads between 300 Ω minimum and 900 Ω maximum after

inserting any board/module, a low impedance problem probably exists in that board/module. Replace

the suspect board/module and repeat the test. If test still fails, isolate the problem before proceeding.

Insert and lock the PS1 DC–DC converter module into its slot, and and turn ON the PS1 DC circuit

breaker on the DC PDA.

5Resistance between the MAP (–) VOLT TEST POINT and the (–) AMP TEST POINT should

typically increase as capacitors charge, finally measuring between 300 Ω minimum and 900 Ω.

maximum.

6Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the PS2 converter module/circuit breaker and all other remaining modules in

the SCCP shelf.

7On the DC PDA, set the PA 1A–1B circuit breaker to the ON position by pushing it in, and repeat step

8Repeat step 7 for each of the three remaining PA circuit breakers.

9Carefully reconnect each PA cable one at a time. Repeat step 5 after reconnecting each cable.

– A typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as module input

capacitors charge, finally indicating between 300 Ω minimum and 900 Ω. maximum.

10 Set the Pilot Beacon, both Heat Exchanger, ETIB, and Options circuit breakers to ON one at a time.

Repeat step 5 after pushing in each circuit breaker.

11 Set all DC PDA circuit breakers to OFF (pulled out).

Pre-Initial Power-up Tests 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

2-8

Figure 2-4: DC PDA

SC4812TL0009–3

LPA

1B 1D 3B 3D

1A 1C 3A 3C PS1 PS2

ETIB

OPTIONS

25 25

HEATEXCHANGER

CAUTION

SHUTOFFBOTHBREAKERS

ONLYDURINGHEATEXCHANGER

MAINTENANCEORREPAIR

LPA

BLOWERS

PUSHBUTTON

TORESET

LPABLOWERS

MAIN BREAKER

300

50 5010 1530 30 30 30 15

PILOT

BEACON

Pre-Initial Power-up Tests68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

2-9

External AC Power Connection Verification

Following verification of frame DC power system integrity, external AC

power connections must be verified. To accomplish this, the series of AC

voltage measurements specified in Table 2-4 is required.

CAUTION Failure to properly connect the external AC power cable will

damage the surge protection module inside the ACLC.

Table 2-4: AC Voltage Measurements

Step Action

1NOTE

This procedure is required only after external AC power wiring has been initially connected or

removed and reconnected to the frame.

n WARNING

Ensure the frame is unpowered by setting the facility circuit breaker controlling external AC power

supplied to the frame to OFF.

Physically verify all DC PDA circuit breakers are set to OFF (pulled out), and all battery shelf circuit

breakers are OFF (pulled out).

2Open the ACLC circuit breaker access door, and set all ACLC circuit breakers to OFF (down).

3Remove the four screws securing the ACLC front panel assembly, and remove the ACLC front panel

assembly to gain access to the AC circuit breaker input terminals (NO TAG).

4Apply external AC power to the frame by setting the facility circuit breaker to ON.

5n WARNING

Do not perform the following steps while wearing an anti–static wrist strap. Serious personal injury

can result from accidently shorting high voltage or high current circuits to ground.

! CAUTION

North AMERICAN Cabinet only:

If the AC voltages measured in the following steps exceed 120 V when measuring from terminals L1

or L2 to neutral or ground, STOP and DO NOT proceed until the cause of the higher voltages are

determined. The frame will be damaged if the Main breaker is turned on with excessive voltage on the

inputs.

Measure the AC voltage from terminal L1 to neutral.

North American Cabinet:

– Voltage should be in the nominal range of 115 to 120 Vac.

International Cabinet:

– Voltage should be in the nominal range of 210 to 240 Vac.

6Measure the AC voltage from terminal L1 to ground.

North American Cabinet:

– Voltage should be in the nominal range of 115 to 120 Vac.

International Cabinet:

– Voltage should be in the nominal range of 210 to 240 Vac.

7Steps 7a through 7c apply to the North American cabinet only. If working on a International cabinet

continue to step 8.

. . . continued on next page

Pre-Initial Power-up Tests 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

2-10

Table 2-4: AC Voltage Measurements

Step Action

7a – Measure the AC voltage from terminal L2 to neutral on the North American cabinet.

–– Voltage should be in the nominal range of 115 to 120 Vac.

7b – Measure the AC voltage from terminal L2 to ground on the North American cabinet.

–– Voltage should be in the nominal range of 115 to 120 Vac.

7c ! CAUTION

If the AC voltages measured (on the North American cabinet) in the following step exceeds 240 V

when measuring between terminals L1 and L2, STOP and DO NOT proceed until the cause of the

higher voltages are determined. The frame will be damaged if the Main breaker is turned on with

excessive voltage on the inputs.

– Measure from terminal L1 to terminal L2.

–– Voltage should be in the nominal range from 208 to 240 Vac.

8Remove external AC power from the frame by setting the facility circuit breaker to OFF.

9Install the ACLC front panel assembly and secure with the four screws removed in step 1.

10 Apply external AC power to the frame by setting the facility circuit breaker to ON.

Applying AC Power68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

2-11

Applying AC Power

Once the external AC power connections are verified, AC power may be

applied internally to the frame. Table 2-5 provides the procedure for

applying internal AC power.

Table 2-5: Applying Internal AC Power

Step Action

1Be sure the requirements of Table 2-4 for AC input power connection verification have been met.

2Be sure all DC PDA circuit breakers are set to OFF (pulled out), all ACLC front–panel circuit

breakers are OFF (down), and all battery shelf circuit breakers are OFF (pulled out).

3Be sure the MAP power switch, TCP switch, and BATT TEST switch are all set to OFF.

4If it has not already been done, set the facility circuit breaker supplying AC power to the frame

to ON.

5Set the ACLC MAIN circuit breaker ON.

– For the North American cabinet:

Observe that all eight (8) green LEDs on the front of the ACLC are illuminated (NO TAG).

– For the International cabinet:

Observe that all four (4) green LEDs on the front of the ACLC are illuminated (NO TAG).

6On the ACLC, set RECT. 1/3 and then RECT. 2/4 branch circuit breakers ON. All the installed

rectifier modules (NO TAG) will start up, and the green DC and PWR LEDs should light on each.

7Set the MAP power switch to ON. The MAP VOLT display should read 27.4 + 0.2 VDC with the

TCP switch OFF.

! CAUTION

Once power is applied to the MAP, be careful not to short either of the VOLT TEST POINTS to

ground. Failure to comply will result in severe damage to the MAP.

8On the MAP, set the TCP switch (Figure 2-5) to ON. Verify no alarm LEDs are lighted on the MAP.

NOTE

Depending on battery compartment temperature, the rectifier voltage displayed on the MAP VOLT

indicator may change by as much as +1.5 V when the TCP is set to on.

9Check the rectifier current bar graph displays (green LED display on the rectifier module). None

should be lighted at this time.

10 If batteries are fitted, set the ACLC HEATER circuit breaker to ON.

NOTE

The GFCI AC circuit breaker should remain OFF unless the GFCI outlet is in use.

Applying AC Power 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

2-12

Figure 2-5: Meter Alarm Panel (MAP)

POWER

SWITCH

POWER

INDICATOR

TCP

SWITCH VOLT TEST

POINTS

25_C SET

MASTER

VOLTAGE

ADJ.

BATT TEST

SWITCH

SC4812TL0015–2

TO DISABLE

SENSOR FAIL

SENSOR 2

SENSOR 1

COMM

DC Power Application and Testing

Table 2-6 lists the step–by–step instructions for applying DC power and

ensuring the DC power system components are correctly functioning.

Table 2-6: DC Power Application and Tests

Step Action

1Be sure all DC PDA and battery shelf circuit breakers are OFF (pulled out).

2Be sure the procedures in Table 2-3 (if applicable) and Table 2-5 have been performed.

3! CAUTION

When measuring voltage at the VOLT TEST POINTS, be careful not to short either of the test points

to ground. Failure to comply will result in severe damage to the MAP.

Measure voltage at the MAP VOLT TEST POINTS while pressing the 25° C SET button

(Figure 2-5). The voltage should read 27.4 + 0.2 Vdc. Adjust with the MASTER VOLTAGE ADJ. on

the MAP, if necessary, to obtain an indicated 27.4+0.2 Vdc. Release the 25° C SET button.

4Depending on the ambient temperature, the voltage reading may now change by up to + 1.5 V

compared to the reading just measured. If it is cooler than 25_C, the voltage will be higher, and if it is

warmer than 25_C, the voltage will be lower.

5Inside the battery compartment, measure the voltage between the cable connection point at the bottom

of the + (red) battery bus bar and chassis ground, observing that the polarity is correct. The voltage

should be the same as the measurement in step 4.

6Measure the voltage between the + (red) and – (black) battery bus bars in the battery compartment.

Place the probe at the bottom of the bus bars where the cables are connected. The DC voltage should

measure the same as in step 4.

7Close (push in) DC PDA MAIN BREAKER.

8On the DC PDA(Figure 2-4), set the PS1 and PS2 circuit breakers to the ON position by pushing

them in one at a time while observing the rectifier output current indicated on the MAP AMP display.

– The display should indicate between 20 and 60 amps.

. . . continued on next page

Applying AC Power68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

2-13

Table 2-6: DC Power Application and Tests

Step Action

9On the DC PDA), set the remaining circuit breakers to the ON position by pushing them in one at a

time in the following sequence:

1. PA (four circuit breakers, labeled 1A–1B through 3C–3D).

2. HEAT EXCHANGER (two circuit breakers)

3. ETIB

4. PILOT BEACON

5. OPTIONS

10 Confirm that the MAP AMP display continues to indicate between 20 and 60 amps during the initial

power application.

NOTE

No battery charging or heavy RF loading is present at this point.

11 If the frame is not equipped with the pilot beacon option, set the PILOT BEACON circuit breaker

to OFF.

Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries)

Table 2-7 lists the step–by–step instructions for testing the battery

charging performance.

Table 2-7: Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries)

Step Action

1Close the battery shelf circuit breakers (NO TAG) for connected batteries only. This process should be

completed quickly to avoid individual battery strings drawing excess charge current

NOTE

If the batteries are sufficiently discharged, the battery circuit breakers may not engage individually

due to the surge current. If this condition occurs, disconnect the batteries from the 27Vdc bus by

setting the MAP power switch to OFF, and then engage all the connected battery circuit breakers.

The MAP power switch should then be turned ON.

2Using the clamp–on DC current probe and DMM, measure the current in each of the battery string

connections to the battery bus bars. The charge current may initially be high but should quickly

reduce in a few minutes if the batteries have a typical new–battery charge level.

. . . continued on next page

Applying AC Power 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

2-14

Table 2-7: Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries)

Step Action

NOTE

The MAP AMP display will indicate the total current output of the rectifiers during this procedure.

As an alternative, the bar graph meters on the AC rectifier modules can be used as a rough estimate of

the total battery charge current. Each rectifier module bar graph has eight (8) LED elements to

represent the output current. Each illuminated LED element indicates that approximately 12.5% (1/8

or 8.75 Amps) of an individual rectifier’s maximum current output (70 Amps) is flowing.

RECTIFIER BAR GRAPH EXAMPLE:

Question: A system fitted with three (3) rectifier modules each have three bar graph LED elements

illuminated. What is the total output current into the batteries?

Answer: Each bar graph is indicating approximately 12.5% of 70 amps, therefore, 3 x 8.75 equals

26.25 amps per rectifier. As there are three rectifiers, the total charge current is equal to (3 x 26.25 A)

78.75 amps.

This charge current calculation is only valid when the RF and PA compartment electronics are not

powered on, and the RF compartment heat exchanger is turned off. This can only be accomplished if

the DC PDA MAIN BREAKER is set to OFF.

3The current in each string should be approximately equal (within + 5 amps).

4Allow a few minutes to ensure that the battery charge current stabilizes before taking any further

action. Recheck the battery current in each string. If the batteries had a reasonable charge, the current

in each string should reduce to less than 5 amps.

5Recheck the DC output voltage. It should remain the same as measured in step 4 of the frame DC

Power Application and Test (Table 2-6).

NOTE

If discharged batteries are installed, the MAP AMP display may indicate approximately 288 amps for

a two–carrier frame (four rectifiers) or 216 amps for a single–carrier frame (three rectifiers).

Alternately, all bar graph elements may be lighted on the rectifiers during the charge test. Either

indication shows that the rectifiers are at full capacity and are rapidly charging the batteries. It is

recommended in this case that the batteries are allowed to charge and stabilize as in the above step

before commissioning the site. This could take several hours.

Battery Discharge Test

Perform the test procedure in Table 2-8 only when the battery current is

less than 5 Amps per string. Refer to Table 2-7 on the procedures for

checking current levels.

Table 2-8: Battery Discharge Test

Step Action

1Turn the BATT TEST switch on the MAP ON (Figure 2-5). The rectifier output voltage and current

should decrease by approximately 10% as the batteries assume the load. Alarms for the MAP may

occur.

2Measure the individual battery string current using the clamp–on DC current probe and DMM. The

battery discharge current in each string should be approximately the same (within + 5 amps).

3Turn BATT TEST switch OFF.

Applying AC Power68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

2-15

CAUTION Failure to turn off the MAP BATT TEST switch before leaving

the site will result in low battery capacity and reduce battery life.

Figure 2-6: Heat Exchanger Blower Assembly and Circuit Breakers

Core

Heat Exchanger

Assembly

Blower

Power

Cord

Bottom (Ambient) Blower

Fan Module

T–30 Screw

Mounting

Bracket

DC PDA

Mounting

Bracket

T–30 Screw

Top (Internal) Blower

Fan Module

Blower

Power

Cord

OUT=OFF

IN=ON

Heat Exchanger

Blower Assembly

Circuit Breaker

Side View SC4812TL0016–3

LPA

1B 1D 3B 3D

1A 1C 3A 3C PS1 PS2

ETIB

OPTIONS

25 25

HEATEXCHANGER

CAUTION

SHUTOFFBOTHBREAKERS

ONLYDURINGHEATEXCHANGER

MAINTENANCEORREPAIR

LPA

BLOWERS

PUSHBUTTON

TORESET

LPABLOWERS

MAIN BREAKER

300

50 5010 1530 30 30 30 15

PILOT

BEACON

Power Removal 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

2-16

Power Removal

Introduction

Power removal from an SC4812T Lite BTS frame is accomplished in the

following two–stage sequence:

1. DC power removal

2. AC power removal

Some maintenance, upgrade, or other activities may only require

removing DC power. In those situations where all power must be

removed from a frame, shutting down AC power will also be required.

Remove DC Power

If it becomes necessary to remove DC power from the frame, refer to

Figure 2-4 and follow the procedure in Table 2-9.

Table 2-9: DC Power Removal

Step Action

1Set all DC PDA circuit breakers to OFF (pulled out) in the

following sequence:

1. PA (four circuit breakers, labeled 1A–1B through 3C–3D)

2. PILOT BEACON

3. HEAT EXCHANGER (two circuit breakers)

4. ETIB

5. OPTIONS

6. PS1 and PS2

7. MAIN BREAKER

2n WARNING

The surge capacitors in the DC PDA will store a large

electrical charge for long periods of time. Failure to discharge

these capacitors as specified in this step could result in serious

personal injury or damage to equipment.

On the DC PDA, set the PS1 and PS2 circuit breakers to ON

(pushed in), and wait at least 30 seconds.

3Set the DC PDA PS1 and PS2 circuit breakers to OFF.

4Set the MAP power switch to OFF.

Power Removal68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

2-17

AC Power Removal

If it is necessary to remove all power from a frame, refer to NO TAG or

NO TAG, and follow the procedure in Table 2-10.

Table 2-10: AC Power Removal

Step Action

1Remove DC power from the frame by following the

procedure in Table 2-9.

2Set all ACLC circuit breakers to OFF (down) in the following

sequence:

1. GFI

2. HEATER

3. RECT. 2/4

4. RECT. 1/3

5. MAIN

3Set the facility circuit breaker controlling external power to

the frame to OFF.

Power Application – Normal Power–up 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

2-18

Power Application – Normal Power–up

Power Application Procedures

After the first power application, applying power to a BTS frame does

not require performing the voltage and resistance measurements called

out in the initial power–up procedure. The only exception to this is after

maintenance when any major power system components were replaced.

Major power system components include:

SACLC

SDC PDA

SMAP

SInternal DC power cables

Normal power application to a BTS frame is accomplished in the

following two–stage sequence:

1. AC power application

2. DC power application

Applying Internal AC Power

To apply AC power to a BTS frame, refer to NO TAG or NO TAG, and

follow the procedure in Table 2-11.

Table 2-11: Apply AC Power to BTS Frame

Step Action

1If the external AC power leads for the BTS frame were disconnected and reconnected, perform the

procedure in Table 2-4 before proceeding further.

2Be sure all DC PDA circuit breakers are set to OFF (pulled out), all ACLC front–panel circuit

breakers are OFF (down), and all battery shelf circuit breakers are OFF (pulled out).

3Be sure the MAP power switch, TCP switch, and BATT TEST switch are all set to OFF (Figure 2-5).

4If it has not already been done, set the facility circuit breaker supplying AC power to the frame

to ON.

5Set the ACLC MAIN circuit breaker ON.

– For the North American cabinet:

Verify that all eight (8) green LEDs on the front of the ACLC are illuminated (NO TAG).

– For the International cabinet:

Verify that all four (4) green LEDs on the front of the ACLC are illuminated (NO TAG).

6On the ACLC, set RECT. 1/3 and then RECT. 2/4 branch circuit breakers ON.

– All the installed rectifier modules (NO TAG) will start up, and the green DC and PWR LEDs

should light on each.

NOTE

In a BTS configured for single–carrier operation (rectifier #4 not installed), a minor alarm may be

generated if the RECT. 2/4 circuit breaker is engaged before the RECT. 1/3 circuit breaker.

. . . continued on next page

Power Application – Normal Power–up68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

2-19

Table 2-11: Apply AC Power to BTS Frame

Step Action

7Set the MAP power switch to ON.

– The MAP VOLT display should read 27.4 + 0.2 VDC with the TCP switch set to OFF.

! CAUTION

Once power is applied to the MAP, be careful not to short either of the VOLT TEST POINTS to

ground. Failure to comply will result in severe damage to the MAP.

8On the MAP, set the TCP switch (Figure 2-5) to ON.

– Verify no alarm LEDs are lighted on the MAP.

NOTE

Depending on battery compartment temperature, the rectifier voltage displayed on the MAP VOLT

indicator may change by as much as +1.5 V when the TCP is set to on.

9Check the rectifier current bar graph displays (green LED display on the rectifier module).

– None should be lighted at this time.

10 If batteries are fitted, set the ACLC HEATER circuit breaker to ON.

NOTE

The GFCI AC circuit breaker should remain OFF unless the GFCI outlet is in use.

Apply DC Power

Refer to Figure 2-4 and follow the procedure in Table 2-12 to apply DC

power to a BTS frame.

Table 2-12: Apply DC Power to BTS Frame

Step Action

1Be sure all DC PDA and battery shelf circuit breakers are OFF (pulled out).

2If it has not already been done, apply AC power to the frame by following the procedure in

Table 2-11.

3Close (push in) DC PDA MAIN BREAKER.

4On the DC PDA(Figure 2-4), set the PS1 and PS2 circuit breakers to the ON position by pushing

them in one at a time while observing the rectifier output current indicated on the MAP AMP display.

– The display should indicate between 20 and 60 amps.

5On the DC PDA), set the remaining circuit breakers to the ON position by pushing them in one at a

time in the following sequence:

1. PA (four circuit breakers, labeled 1A–1B through 3C–3D)

2. HEAT EXCHANGER (two circuit breakers)

3. ETIB

4. (If Pilot Beacon option is installed) PILOT BEACON

5. OPTIONS

. . . continued on next page

Power Application – Normal Power–up 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

2-20

Table 2-12: Apply DC Power to BTS Frame

Step Action

6Confirm that the MAP AMP display continues to indicate between 20 and 60 amps during power

application.

NOTE

No battery charging or heavy RF loading is present at this point.

7If the frame is equipped with back–up batteries, close (push in) the battery shelf circuit breakers

(NO TAG) for connected batteries only. This process should be completed quickly to avoid excess

charge current draw by individual battery strings.

NOTE

If the batteries are sufficiently discharged, the battery circuit breakers may not engage individually

because of surge current. If this condition occurs, disconnect the batteries from the 27Vdc bus by

setting the MAP power switch to OFF, and then engage all the connected battery circuit breakers. The

MAP power switch should then be turned ON.

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-1

Chapter 3

Optimization/Calibration

Introduction to Optimization and Calibration 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-2

Introduction to Optimization and Calibration

Overview

This section describes procedures for isolating the BTS from the span

lines, preparing and using the LMF, downloading system operating

software, CSM reference verification/optimization, set up and calibration

of the supported test equipment, transmit/receive path verification, using

the RFDS, and verifying the customer defined alarms and relay contacts

are functioning properly.

NOTE Before using the LMF, use an editor to view the “CAVEATS”

section in the “readme.txt” file in the c:\wlmf folder for any

applicable information.

Optimization Process Summary

After a BTS is physically installed and the preliminary operations, such

as power up, have been completed, the LMF is used to optimize the

BTS. Companion frames must be optimized individually as separate

BTSs. The basic optimization process consists of the following:

1. Download MGLI (GLI–bts#–1) with application code and data and

then enable MGLI.

NOTE GLIs may be GLI2s or GLI3s.

2. Use the LMF status function and verify that all of the installed

devices of the following types respond with status information:

CSM, BBX, GLI, MCC8, and, if RFDS is installed, TSU or

RFDS–1X RPROC. If a device is installed and powered up but is

not responding and is colored gray in the BTS display, the device is

not listed in the CDF file. The CDF/NECF file must be corrected

before the device can be accessed by the LMF.

3. Download device application code and data to all devices of the

following types:

– CSM

– BBX

– Remaining GLI (GLI–bts#–2)

– MCC

4. Download the RFDS TSIC or RFDS–1X RPROC (if installed).

5. Verify the operation of the GPS and HSO signals.

6. Enable the following devices (in the order listed):

– Secondary CSM (slot CSM 2)

– Primary CSM (slot CSM 1)

– All MCCs

7. Using the LMF test equipment selection function, select the test

equipment to be used for the calibration.

8. Calibrate the TX and RX test cables if they have not previously been

calibrated with the LMF computer and software build which will be

used for the optimization/calibration. Cable calibration values can be

entered manually, if required.

Introduction to Optimization and Calibration68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-3

9. Connect the required test equipment for a full optimization.

10. Select all of the BBXs and all of the MCCs and use the full

optimization function. The full optimization function performs TX

calibration, BLO download, TX audit, all TX tests, and all RX tests

for all selected devices.

11. If the TX calibration fails, repeat the full optimization for any failed

paths.

12. If the TX calibration fails again, troubleshoot and correct the

problem causing the failure, and repeat the full optimization for the

failed path.

13. If the TX calibration and audit portion of the full optimization passes

for a path but some of the TX or RX tests fail, troubleshoot and

correct the problem causing the failure, and run the individual tests

as required until all TX and RX tests have passed for all paths.

Cell-site Types

Sites are configured as Omni/Omni or Sector/Sector (TX/RX).

Sector/Sector sites are the three–sector configuration. The SC4812ET

Lite does not support six–sector operation. Each cell site type has unique

characteristics and must be optimized accordingly.

NOTE For more information on the different in site types, please refer

to the applicable Hardware Installation manual.

CDF/NECF

The CDF/NECF (Configuration Data File/Network Element

Configuration File) contains information that defines the BTS and data

used to download files to the devices. A CDF/NECF file must be placed

in the applicable BTS folder before the LMF can be used to log into that

BTS. CDF/NECF files are normally obtained from the CBSC using a

floppy disk. A file transfer protocol (ftp) method can be used if the LMF

computer has that capability. Refer to the LMF Help function on–line

documentation for more information.

The CDF/NECF includes the following information:

SDownload instructions and protocol

SSite specific equipage information

SSCCP shelf allocation plan

– BBX equipage (based on cell–site type) including IS–95A/B or

CDMA2000 1X capability and redundancy

– CSM equipage including redundancy

– Multi Channel Card 24E, 8E, or –1X (MCC24E, MCC8E, or

MCC–1X) channel element allocation plan. This plan indicates how

the SCCP shelf is configured, and how the paging, synchronization,

traffic, and access channel elements (and associated gain values) are

assigned among the (up to 4) MCC24Es, MCC8Es, and/or

MCC–1Xs in the shelf.

SEffective Rated Power (ERP) table for all TX channels to antennas

respectively. Motorola System Engineering specifies the ERP of a

Introduction to Optimization and Calibration 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-4

transmit antenna based on site geography, antenna placement, and

government regulations. Working from this ERP requirement, antenna

gain and antenna feed line loss can be combined to calculate the

required transmit power at the frame antenna connections. The

corresponding BBX output power required to achieve that power level

on any channel/sector can then be determined based on Bay Level

Offset (BLO) data established during the optimization process.

NOTE Refer to Figure 3-1 and the LMF Help function on–line

documentation for additional information on the layout of the

LMF directory structure (including CDF/NECF file locations

and formats).

BTS System Software Download

BTS system software must be successfully downloaded to the BTS

processor boards before optimization can be performed. BTS operating

code is loaded from the LMF computer terminal.

BTSs configured for Circuit Backhaul use bts.cdf files. BTSs configured

for Packet Backhaul use bts.necf files (bts–xxx.xml) located on the

OMC/R.

NOTE Before using the LMF for optimization/ATP, the correct

bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf or bts–#.necf and cbsc–#.necf files for

the BTS must be obtained from the CBSC and put in a bts–#

folder in the LMF. Failure to use the correct CDF/NECF files

can cause wrong results. Failure to use the correct CDF/NECF

files to log into a live (traffic carrying) site can shut down the

site.

The CDF/NECF is normally obtained from the CBSC on a DOS

formatted diskette, or through a file transfer protocol (ftp) if the LMF

computer has ftp capability. Refer to the LMF Help function on–line

documentation for the procedure.

Site Equipage Verification

If you have not already done so, use an editor to view the CDF/NECF,

and review the site documentation. Verify the site engineering equipage

data in the CDF/NECF matches the actual site hardware using a

CDF/NECF conversion table.

CAUTION – Use extreme care not to make any changes to the

CDF/NECF content while viewing the file. Changes to the

CDF/NECF can cause the site to operate unreliably or

render it incapable of operation.

– Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap

while handling any circuit card/module to prevent damage

by ESD. Extreme care should be taken during the removal

and installation of any card/module. After removal, the

card/module should be placed on a conductive surface or

back into the anti–static bag in which it was shipped.

Preparing the LMF68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-5

Preparing the LMF

Overview of Packet BTS files

R16.0 and earlier releases had the configuration file called CDF for each

BTS and CBSC used by LMF. In 16.1 Packet BTS, BTS with GLI3

booting in packet binary, the CDF is replaced by two new configuration

files called Network Element Configuration Base (NECB) and Network

Element Change Journal (NECJ). The NECB contains the baseline

configuration and is analogous to the CDF, while the NECJ contains all

the changes made to the configuration since the last time the NECB was

re–generated. Once the NECJ gets to 80% of its maximum size, the

NECB is re–generated and all the updates are rolled into it.

These files play much broader and vital role than previous CDF files.

GLI3 booting in circuit binaries works similar to R16.0.

A few LMF related important facts about these files are listed below.

SBoth files (NECB and NECJ) are in XML format.

SNECB contains all the up-to-date static configuration information and

NECJ contains all the recent changes (including operations) which are

not updated in the NECB.

SBoth files can be viewed in any XML viewer (most easily available is

Internet Explorer V5.0 and higher). They can be also viewed by any

other word processor, but the XML tags will also be seen with them.

SThese files will be created by OMC–R from MIB as per the BTS

provisioning.

SThese files will be regenerated for each software release upgrade on

the system for each BTS.

SThese files will reside on both OMC–R and Packet–GLI3 (unlike

CDF) and will be synchronized periodically between them.

SBoth NECB and NECJ file contain a “SoftwareVersion” field in their

header section indicating the system release version of these files.

SInstead of the bts#.cdf file, the packet LMF uses a bts#.XML file,

which is a copy of the NECB.XML file.

SPacket–GLI3 will need these files for site initialization.

SThe scope of NECB has grown much broader than CDF and has much

more BTS centric information. The use of generic version of these

files should be strictly avoided for the correct site initialization.

Preparing the LMF 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-6

LMF Features and Installation Requirements

Before optimization can be performed, the LMF application software

must be installed and configured on a computer platform meeting

Motorola–specified requirements (see Recommended Test Equipment

and Software in Chapter 1).

NOTE For the LMF graphics to display properly, the computer platform

must be configured to display more than 256 colors. See the

operating system software instructions for verifying and

configuring the display settings.

Software and files for installing and updating the LMF are provided on

CD ROM disks. The following items must be available:

SLMF application program on CD ROM

SCDF/NECF for each supported BTS (on diskette or available from the

CBSC)

SCBSC File for each supported BTS (on floppy disk or CD ROM)

FTP Server

To be able to download files to the GLI3, the LMF now runs FTP server

on the LMF laptop. The LMF FTP server runs from the LMFs home

directory. All the files necessary to run the LMF FTP server are installed

from the LMF CD. The FTP server is automatically started by the LMF

upon successful Login to a Packet BTS.

In addition, the LMF provides a new option in the Tools menu called

FTP Server. The option starts the LMFs FTP server if Start is selected,

and stops the server if Stop is selected. The LMFs FTP server runs on

port 21. If any other process is using that port, the error message is

displayed to the user stating that the port is occupied. There is another

option under FTP Server menu called FTP Monitor, which allows the

user to watch FTP activity b/w the LMF and GLI.

Firewalls

Firewalls will block the FTP requests from the Packet GLI to the LMF

laptop. You must disable your firewall before attempting the BTS Synch

command. Some common firewall programs to look for include Network

ICE, BlackICE, Norton’s Desktop Firewall, Enterprise Firewall, and

Personal Firewall.

FTP Server Port in use

On some Windows 2000 installations, a process called “inetd.exe”

makes the FTP server port 21 unusable by the LMF. If the LMF reports

that the FTP server could not start because the port is in use, make sure

the inetd.exe is not running by using the Task Manager’s process list. If

inetd.exe is running, end the process by selecting it and clicking the

“End Process” button. Inetd32.exe is NOT the same and ending it will

not resolve this problem.

Preparing the LMF68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-7

LMF File Structure Overview

The LMF uses a <x>:\<lmf home directory> folder that contains all of

the essential data for installing and maintaining the BTS. The following

list outlines the folder structure for LMF. Except for the bts-nnn folders,

these folders are created as part of the LMF installation. Refer to the

CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide for a complete description of the folder

structure.

Figure 3-1: LMF Folder Structure

version folder (A separate folder is

required for each different version; for

example, a folder name 2.8.1.1.1.5.)

loads folder

(C:)

x:\<lmf home directory> folder

cdma folder

code folder

data folder

BTS–nnn folders (A separate folder is

required for each BTS where bts–nnn is the

unique BTS number; for example, bts–163.)

NOTE The “loads” folder and all the folders below it are not available

from the LMF for Software Release 2.16.1.x. These folders may

be present as as a legacy from previous software versions or

downloaded from the CBSC/OMC–R.

Preparing the LMF 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-8

LMF Home Directory

The LMF installation program creates the default home directory,

c:\wlmf, and installs the application files and subdirectories (folders)

in it. Because this can be changed at installation, the CDMA LMF home

directory will be referred to with the generic convention of:

Where:

<x> = the LMF computer drive letter where the CDMA LMF home

directory is located.

<lmf home directory> = the directory path or name where the CDMA

LMF is installed.

Preparing the LMF68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-9

NECF Filename Conventions and Directory Location

NECF

The NECF actually consists of two files: the NECB and NECJ. The

naming convention for the NECB and NECJ is:

NECB*bts#.xml

NECJ*bts#.xml

Where:

* = any characters can be substituted there

# = the actual integer BTS number

The NECB and its corresponding NECJ must have the exact same name,

except for the “B” and “J” difference after the initial NEC characters.

The NECB and the NECJ must reside in the

<LMF_HOME>\cdma\bts–# directory corresponding to the BTS frame

they are for.

Load Information File (LIF)

The LIF contains all the devices binaries available for the specified

System Software Release. It is the functional equivalent of the OLF file

that was used pre–Packet.

The naming convention for the LIF is:

NE_LIF.xml

The LIF must reside in the <LMF_HOME>\cdma\loads\<Software

Release Number> directory, where <LMF_HOME> = the home

directory in which the LMF is installed, usually C:\wlmf <Software

Release Number> = the System Software Release Number (e.g.

2.16.1.0.10).

Cal File

The Cal File still resides in the <LMF_HOME>\cdma\bts–# directory

and is named bts–#.cal, where # is the actual integer number of the BTS.

Preparing the LMF 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-10

LMF Installation and Update Procedures

This section provides information and instructions for installing and

updating the LMF software and files.

NOTE First Time Installation Sequence:

1. Install Java Runtime Environment (JRE)

2. Install U/WIN K–shell emulator

3. Install LMF application programs

4. Install/create BTS folders

NOTE Any time you install U/WIN, you must install the LMF software

because the installation of the LMF modifies some of the files

that are installed during the U/Win installation. Installing U/Win

over–writes these modifications.

There are multiple binary image packages for installation on the

CD–ROM. When prompted, choose the load that corresponds to

the switch release that you currently have installed. Perform the

Device Images install after the WinLMF installation.

If applicable, a separate CD ROM of BTS Binaries may be

available for binary updates.

Follow the procedure in Table 3-1 to install the LMF application

program using the LMF CD ROM.

Table 3-1: Install LMF using CD ROM

nStep Action

1Insert the LMF CD ROM disk into your disk drive and perform the

following as required:

1a – If the Setup screen appears, follow the instructions displayed on

the screen.

1b – If the Setup screen is not displayed, proceed to Step 2.

2Click on the Start button

3 Select Run.

4 Enter d:\autorun in the Open box and click OK.

NOTE

If applicable, replace the letter d with the correct CD ROM drive

letter.

Preparing the LMF68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-11

Copy BTS and CBSC CDF (or NECF) Files to the LMF Computer

Before logging on to a BTS with the LMF computer to execute

optimization/ATP procedures, the correct bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf (or

bts–#.necf and cbsc–#.necf) files must be obtained from the CBSC and

put in a bts-# folder in the LMF computer. This requires creating

versions of the CBSC CDF files on a DOS–formatted floppy diskette

and using the diskette to install the CDF files on the LMF computer.

NOTE – If the LMF has ftp capability, the ftp method can be used to

copy the CDF or NECF files from the CBSC.

– On Sun OS workstations, the unix2dos command can be

used in place of the cp command (e.g., unix2dos

bts–248.cdf bts–248.cdf). This should be done using a copy

of the CBSC CDF file so the original CBSC CDF file is

not changed to DOS format.

NOTE When copying CDF or NECF files, comply with the following

to prevent BTS login problems with the Windows LMF:

SThe numbers used in the bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf (or

bts–#.necf and cbsc–#.necf) filenames must correspond to

the locally-assigned numbers for each BTS and its controlling

CBSC.

SThe generic cbsc–1.cdf (or cbsc–#.necf) file supplied with

the Windows LMF will work with locally numbered BTS

CDF files. Using this file will not provide a valid

optimization unless the generic file is edited to replace

default parameters (e.g., channel numbers) with the

operational parameters used locally.

The procedure in Table 3-2 lists the steps required to transfer the CDF

files from the CBSC to the LMF computer. For further information, refer

to the LMF Help function on–line documentation.

Table 3-2: Copying CDF or NECF Files to the LMF Computer

nStep Action

AT THE CBSC:

1Login to the CBSC workstation.

2Insert a DOS–formatted floppy diskette in the workstation drive.

3 Type eject –q and press the Enter key.

4 Type mount and press the Enter key.

NOTE

SLook for the “floppy/no_name” message on the last line displayed.

SIf the eject command was previously entered, floppy/no_name will be appended with a number.

Use the explicit floppy/no_name reference displayed when performing step 7.

5Change to the directory, where the files to be copied reside, by typing cd <directoryname>

(e.g., cd bts–248) and pressing the Enter key.

. . . continued on next page

Preparing the LMF 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-12

Table 3-2: Copying CDF or NECF Files to the LMF Computer

nActionStep

6 Type ls and press the Enter key to display the list of files in the directory.

7 With Solaris versions of Unix, create DOS–formatted versions of the bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf (or

bts–#.necf and cbsc–#.necf) files on the diskette by entering the following command:

unix2dos <source filename> /floppy/no_name/<target filename>

(e.g., unix2dos bts–248.cdf /floppy/no_name/bts–248.cdf).

NOTE

SOther versions of Unix do not support the unix2dos and dos2unix commands. In these cases, use

the Unix cp (copy) command. The copied files will be difficult to read with a DOS or Windows text

editor because Unix files do not contain line feed characters. Editing copied CDF files on the LMF

computer is, therefore, not recommended.

SUsing cp, multiple files can be copied in one operation by separating each filename to be copied

with a space and ensuring the destination directory (floppy/no_name) is listed at the end of the

command string following a space (e.g., cp bts–248.cdf cbsc–6.cdf /floppy/no_name).

8Repeat Steps 5 through 7 for each bts–# that must be supported by the LMF computer.

9When all required files have been copied to the diskette type eject and press the Enter key.

10 Remove the diskette from the CBSC drive.

AT THE LMF:

11 If it is not running, start the Windows operating system on the LMF computer.

12 Insert the diskette containing the bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf (or bts–#.necf and cbsc–#.necf) files into

the LMF computer.

13 Using MS Windows Explorer, create a corresponding bts–# folder in the <x>:\<lmf home

directory>\cdma directory for each bts–#.cdf/cbsc–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf/cbsc–#.cdf) file pair copied

from the CBSC.

14 Use MS Windows Explorer to transfer the bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf (or bts–#.necf and cbsc–#.necf)

files from the diskette to the corresponding <x>:\<lmf home directory>\cdma\bts–# folders created in

Step 13.

Preparing the LMF68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-13

Creating a Named HyperTerminal Connection for MMI Communication

Confirming or changing the configuration data of certain BTS Field

Replaceable Units (FRU) requires establishing an MMI communication

session between the LMF and the FRU. Using features of the Windows

operating system, the connection properties for an MMI session can be

saved on the LMF computer as a named Windows HyperTerminal

connection. This eliminates the need for setting up connection

parameters each time an MMI session is required to support

optimization.

Once the named connection is saved, a shortcut for it can be created on

the Windows desktop. Double–clicking the shortcut icon will start the

connection without the need to negotiate multiple menu levels.

Follow the procedures in Table 3-3 to establish a named HyperTerminal

connection and create a Windows desktop shortcut for it.

Table 3-3: Create HyperTerminal Connection

Step Action

1From the Windows Start menu, select:

Programs>Accessories>

2Perform one of the following:

SFor Win NT, select Hyperterminal and then click on HyperTerminal or

SFor Win 98, select Communications, double click the Hyperterminal folder, and then double click

on the Hyperterm.exe icon in the window that opens.

NOTE

SIf a Location Information Window appears, enter the required information, then click on the

Close button. (This is required the first time, even if a modem is not to be used.)

SIf a You need to install a modem..... message appears, click on NO.

3When the Connection Description box opens:

– Type a name for the connection being defined (e.g., MMI Session) in the Name: window,

– Highlight any icon preferred for the named connection in the Icon: chooser window, and

– Click OK.

4From the Connect using: pick list in the Connect To box displayed, select COM1 or COM2 (Win

NT) – or Direct to Com 1 or Direct to Com 2 (Win 98) for the RS–232 port connection and click OK.

NOTE

For LMF computer configurations where COM1 is used by another interface such as test equipment

and a physical port is available for COM2, select COM2 in the following step to prevent conflicts.

5In the Port Settings tab of the COM# Properties window displayed, configure the RS–232 port

settings as follows:

SBits per second: 9600

SData bits: 8

SParity: None

SStop bits: 1

SFlow control: None

. . . continued on next page

Preparing the LMF 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-14

Table 3-3: Create HyperTerminal Connection

Step Action

6 Click OK.

7Save the defined connection by selecting:

File > Save

8Close the HyperTerminal window by selecting:

File > Exit

9Click the Yes button to disconnect when prompted.

10 Perform one of the following:

SIf the Hyperterminal folder window is still open (Win 98) proceed to step 12

SFrom the Windows Start menu, select Programs > Accessories.

11 Perform one of the following:

SFor Win NT, select Hyperterminal and release any pressed mouse buttons.

SFor Win 98, select Communications and double click the Hyperterminal folder.

12 Highlight the newly–created connection icon by clicking on it.

13 Right click and drag the highlighted connection icon to the Windows desktop and release the right

mouse button.

14 From the popup menu which appears, select Create Shortcut(s) Here.

15 If desired, reposition the shortcut icon for the new connection by dragging it to another location on the

Windows desktop.

16 Close the Hyperterminal folder window by selecting:

File > Close

Span Lines – Interface and Isolation68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-15

Span Lines – Interface and Isolation

T1/E1 Span Interface

NOTE At active sites, the OMC–R/CBSC must disable the BTS and

place it out of service (OOS). DO NOT remove the span line

cable connectors until the OMC–R/CBSC has disabled the BTS.

Each frame is equipped with one 50–pair punchblock for spans,

customer alarms, remote GPS, and BTS frame alarms. See NO TAG and

refer to NO TAG for the physical location and punchdown location

information.

Before connecting the LMF computer to the frame LAN, the

OMC–R/CBSC must disable the BTS and place it OOS. This will allow

the LMF to control the BTS, and prevent the CBSC from inadvertently

sending control information to the BTS during LMF–based tests.

Isolate BTS from T1/E1 Span(s)

Once the OMC–R/CBSC has disabled the BTS, the span(s) must be

disabled to ensure the LMF will maintain control of the BTS. To disable

the spans, disconnect the BTS–to–CBSC Transcoder span cable

connectors from the Span I/O cards (Figure 3-2).

Figure 3-2: Span I/O Board T1 Span Isolation

50–PIN TELCO

CONNECTORS

REMOVED

SPAN B CONNECTOR

(TELCO) INTERFACE

TO SPAN LINES

(IF USED

SPAN A CONNECTOR

(TELCO) INTERFACE

TO SPAN LINES

TOP of Frame

(Site I/O and Span I/O boards)

RS–232 9–PIN SUB D

CONNECTOR SERIAL

PORT FOR EXTERNAL

DIAL UP MODEM

CONNECTION (IF USED)

FW00299 REF

Span Lines – Interface and Isolation 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-16

T1/E1 Span Isolation

Table 3-4 describes the action required for span isolation.

Table 3-4: T1/E1 Span Isolation

Step Action

1Have the OMCR/CBSC place the BTS OOS.

2To disable the span lines, locate the connector for the span or

spans which must be disabled and remove the respective

connector from the applicable SCCP cage Span I/O board

(Figure 3-2).

LMF to BTS Connection68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-17

LMF to BTS Connection

Connect the LMF to the BTS

The LMF computer may be connected to the LAN A or B connector

located behind the frame lower air intake grill. Figure 3-3 below shows

the general location of these connectors. LAN A is considered the

primary LAN.

Table 3-5: Connecting the LMF to the BTS

nStep Action

1To gain access to the LAN connectors, open the LAN cable access door, then pull apart the fabric

covering the BNC “T” connector and slide out the service tray, if desired (see Figure 3-3).

2Connect the LMF computer to the LAN A (left–hand) BNC connector via PCMCIA Ethernet Adapter.

NOTE

Xircom Model PE3–10B2 or equivalent can also be used to interface the LMF Ethernet connection to

the BTS frame connected to the PC parallel port, powered by an external AC/DC transformer. In this

case, the BNC cable must not exceed 91 cm (3 ft) in length.

* IMPORTANT

The LAN shield is isolated from chassis ground. The LAN shield (exposed portion of BNC connector)

must not touch the chassis during optimization.

Figure 3-3: LMF Connection Detail

10BaseT/10Base2

Converter Connects

Directly to BNC T

LMF BNC “T” Connections on

left side of frame (Ethernet

“A” shown; Ethernet “B”

covered with hook–and–loop

fabric)

LMF Computer

Terminal with Mouse

PCMCIA Ethernet

Adpater & Ethernet

UTP Adapter

Universal Twisted

Pair (UTP) cable

(RJ11 connectors)

115 VAC Power

Connection

NOTE:

Open LAN CABLE ACCESS door.

Pull apart hook–and–loop fabric

and gain access to the LAN A or

LAN B LMF BNC connector.

ti-CDMA-WP-00232-v01-ildoc-ftw

SC 4812T LITE

Using the LMF 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-18

Using the LMF

Basic LMF Operation

LMF Coverage in This Publication – The LMF application program

supports maintenance of both CDMA and SAS BTSs. All references to

the LMF in this publication are to the CDMA portion of the program.

Operating Environments – The LMF application program allows the

user to work in the two following operating environments which are

accessed using the specified desktop icons:

SGraphical User Interface (GUI) using the WinLMF icon

SCommand Line Interface (CLI) using the WinLMF CDMA CLI icon

The GUI is the primary optimization and acceptance testing operating

environment. The CLI environment provides additional capability to the

user to perform manually controlled acceptance tests and audit the

results of optimization and calibration actions.

Basic Operation – Basic operation of the LMF in either environment

includes performing the following:

SSelecting and deselecting BTS devices

SEnabling devices

SDisabling devices

SResetting devices

SObtaining device status

The following additional basic operation can be performed in a GUI

environment:

SSorting a status report window

For detailed information on performing these and other LMF operations,

refer to the LMF Help function on–line documentation.

NOTE Unless otherwise noted, LMF procedures in this manual are

performed using the GUI environment.

Using the LMF68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-19

The LMF Display and the BTS

BTS Display – When the LMF is logged into a BTS, a frame tab is

displayed for each BTS frames. The frame tab will be labeled with

“CDMA” and the BTS number, a dash, and the frame number (for

example, BTS–812–1 for BTS 812, RFMF 1). If there is only one frame

for the BTS, there will only be one tab.

CDF/NECF Requirements – For the LMF to recognize the devices

installed in the BTS, a BTS CDF/NECF file which includes equipage

information for all the devices in the BTS must be located in the

applicable <x>:\<lmf home directory>\cdma\bts–# folder. To provide

the necessary channel assignment data for BTS operation, a CBSC CDF

file which includes channel data for all BTS RFMFs is also required in

the folder.

RFDS Display – If an RFDS is included in the CDF/NECF file, an

RFDS tab labeled with “RFDS,” a dash and the BTS number–frame

number combination (for example, RFDS–812–1) will be displayed.

Graphical User Interface Overview

The LMF uses a GUI, which works in the following way:

SSelect the device or devices.

SSelect the action to apply to the selected device(s).

SWhile action is in progress, a status report window displays the action

taking place and other status information.

SThe status report window indicates when the the action is complete

and displays other pertinent information.

SClicking the OK button closes the status report window.

Using the LMF 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-20

Understanding GUI Operation

The following screen captures are provided to help understand how the

GUI operates:

– Figure 3-4 depicts the differences between packet and circuit

CDMA “cdf” file identification. Note that if there is a packet

version “bts” file, the “(P)” is added as a suffix. There is a

corresponding “(C)” for the circuit mode version.

– Figure 3-5 depicts the Self-Managed Network Elements (NEs) state

of a packet mode SC4812T. Note that an “X” is on the front of each

card that is under Self–Managed Network Elements (NEs) control

by the GLI3 card.

– Figure 3-6 depicts three of the available packet mode commands.

Normally the GLI3 has Self-Managed Network Elements (NEs)

control of all cards as shown in Figure 3-5 by an “(X)”. In that state

the LMF may only status a card. In order to download code or test a

card, the LMF must request Self-Managed Network Elements (NEs)

control of the card by using the shown dropdown menu. It also uses

this menu to release control of the card back to the GLI3. The GLI3

will also assume control of the cards after the LMF logs out of the

BTS. The packet mode GLI3 normally is loaded with a tape release

and NECB and NECJ files which point to a tape release stored on

the GLI3. When the GLI3 has control of a card it will maintain that

card with the code on that tape release.

– Figure 3-7 depicts a packet mode site that has the MCC–1 and the

BBX–1 cards under LMF control. Notice that the “X” is missing

from the front of these two cards.

For detailed information on performing these and other LMF operations,

refer to the LMF Help function on–line documentation.

Using the LMF68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-21

Figure 3-4: BTS Login screen – identifying circuit and packet BTS files

Using the LMF 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-22

Figure 3-5: Self–Managed Network Elements (NEs) state of a packet mode SC4812T

Using the LMF68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-23

Figure 3-6: Available packet mode commands

Using the LMF 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-24

Figure 3-7: Packet mode site with MCC–1 and BBX–1 under LMF control

Using the LMF68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-25

Command Line Interface Overview

The LMF also provides Command Line Interface (CLI) capability.

Activate the CLI by clicking on a shortcut icon on the desktop. The CLI

can not be launched from the GUI, only from the desktop icon.

Both the GUI and the CLI use a program known as the handler. Only one

handler can be running at one time. The architectural design is such that

the GUI must be started before the CLI if you want the GUI and CLI to

use the same handler.

When the CLI is launched after the GUI, the CLI automatically finds and

uses an in–progress login session with a BTS initiated under the GUI.

This allows the use of the GUI and the CLI in the same BTS login

session.

If a CLI handler is already running when the GUI is launched (this

happens if the CLI window is already running when the user starts the

GUI, or if another copy of the GUI is already running when the user

starts the GUI), a dialog window displays the following warning

message:

The CLI handler is already running.

This may cause conflicts with the LMF.

Are you sure that you want to start the application?

This window also contains yes and no buttons. Selecting yes starts the

application. Selecting no terminates the application.

CLI Format Conventions

The CLI command can be broken down in the following way:

SVerb

SDevice including device identifier parameters

SSwitch

SOption parameters consisting of:

– Keywords

– Equals sign (=) between the keyword and the parameter value

– Parameter values

Spaces are required between the verb, device, switch, and option

parameters. A hyphen is required between the device and its identifiers.

Following is an example of a CLI command.

measure bbx–<bts_id>–<bbx_id> rssi channel=6 sector=5

Refer to the LMF CLI Commands for a complete explanation of the CLI

commands and their usage.

Using the LMF 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-26

Logging Into a BTS

Logging into a BTS establishes a communication link between the BTS

and the LMF. An LMF session can be logged into only one BTS at a

time.

Prerequisites

Before attempting to log into a BTS, ensure the following have been

completed:

SThe LMF is correctly installed on the LMF computer.

SA bts-nnn folder with the correct CDF/NECF and CBSC files exists.

SThe LMF computer was connected to the BTS before starting the

Windows operating system and the LMF software. If necessary, restart

the computer after connecting it to the BTS in accordance with

Table 3-5 and Figure 3-3.

CAUTION Be sure that the correct bts–#.cdf/necf and cbsc–#.cdf file are

used for the BTS. These should be the CDF/NECF files that are

provided for the BTS by the CBSC. Failure to use the correct

CDF/NECF files can result in invalid optimization. Failure to

use the correct CDF/NECF files to log into a live

(traffic–carrying) site can shut down the site.

BTS Login from the GUI Environment

Follow the procedures in Table 3-6 to log into a BTS when using the

GUI environment.

Table 3-6: BTS GUI Login Procedure

nStep Action

1Start the LMF GUI environment by double–clicking on the WinLMF desktop icon (if the LMF is

not running).

– An LMF window will open and display the LMF build number in the title bar.

NOTE

If a warning similar to the following is displayed, select No, shut down other LMF sessions which

may be running, and start the LMF GUI environment again:

The CLI handler is already running.

This may cause conflicts with the LMF.

Are you sure you want to start the application?

Yes No

2Click on Login tab (if not displayed).

3Double click on CDMA (in the Available Base Stations pick list).

4Click on the desired BTS number.

5Click on the Network Login tab (if not already in the forefront).

6Enter correct IP address (normally 128.0.0.2) for a field BTS, if not correctly displayed in the IP

Address box.

. . . continued on next page

Using the LMF68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-27

Table 3-6: BTS GUI Login Procedure

nActionStep

7Type in the correct IP Port number (normally 9216) if not correctly displayed in the IP Port box.

8Click on Ping.

– If the connection is successful, the Ping Display window shows text similar to the following:

Reply from 128 128.0.0.2: bytes=32 time=3ms TTL=255

– If there is no response the following is displayed:

128.0.0.2:9216:Timed out

If the MGLI fails to respond, reset and perform the ping process again. If the MGLI still fails to

respond, typical problems are shorted BNC to inter–frame cabling, open cables, crossed A and B

link cables, missing 50–Ohm terminators, or the MGLI itself.

9Select the Multi-channel Preselector type from the Multi-channel Preselector drop–down list

(default is MPC) to a device corresponding to your BTS configuration, if required.

NOTE

“Use a Tower Top Amplifier” is not applicable to the SC4812T Lite.

10 Click on Login. (A BTS tab with the BTS and frame numbers is displayed.)

NOTE

SIf an attempt is made to log into a BTS that is already logged on, all devices will be gray.

SThere may be instances where the BTS initiates a log out due to a system error (i.e., a device

failure).

SIf the MGLI is OOS–ROM (blue), it must be downloaded with RAM code before other devices

can be seen.

SIf the MGLI is OOS–RAM (yellow), it must be enabled before other installed devices can be

seen.

Using the LMF 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-28

BTS Login from the CLI Environment

Follow the procedures in Table 3-7 to log into a BTS when using the

CLI environment.

NOTE If the CLI and GUI environments are to be used at the same

time, the GUI must be started first and BTS login must be

performed from the GUI. Refer to Table 3-6 to start the GUI

environment and log into a BTS.

Table 3-7: BTS CLI Login Procedure

nStep Action

1Double–click the WinLMF CLI desktop icon (if the LMF CLI

environment is not already running).

NOTE

If a BTS was logged into under a GUI session before the CLI

environment was started, the CLI session will be logged into the same

BTS, and step 2 is not required.

2At the /wlmf prompt, enter the following command:

where:

host = MGLI card IP address (defaults to address last logged into for

this BTS or 128.0.0.2 if this is first login to this BTS)

port = IP port of the BTS (defaults to port last logged into for this

BTS or 9216 if this is first login to this BTS)

A response similar to the following will be displayed:

LMF>

13:08:18.882 Command Received and Accepted

COMMAND=login bts–33

13:08:18.882 Command In Progress

13:08:21.275 Command Successfully Completed

REASON_CODE=”No Reason”

Using the LMF68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-29

Logging Out

Logging out of a BTS is accomplished differently for the GUI and CLI

operating environments.

NOTE The GUI and CLI environments use the same connection to a

BTS. If a GUI and the CLI session are running for the same BTS

at the same time, logging out of the BTS in either environment

will log out of it for both. When either a login or logout is

performed in the CLI window, there is no GUI indication that the

Logging Out of a BTS from the GUI Environment

Follow the procedure in Table 3-8 to logout of a BTS when using the

GUI environment.

Table 3-8: BTS GUI Logout Procedure

nStep Action

1Click on BTS in the BTS menu bar.

2Click the Logout item in the pull–down menu (a Confirm Logout

pop-up message will appear).

3Click on Yes (or press the Enter key) to confirm logout. The Login

tab will appear.

NOTE

If a logout was previously performed on the BTS from a CLI window

running at the same time as the GUI, a Logout Error pop–up

message will appear stating the system could not log out of the BTS.

When this occurs, the GUI must be exited and restarted before it can

be used for further operations.

4If a Logout Error pop–up message appears stating that the system

could not log out of the Base Station because the given BTS is not

logged in, click OK and proceed to Step 5.

5 Select File > Exit in the window menu bar, click Yes in the Confirm

Logout pop–up, and click OK in the Logout Error pop–up which

appears again.

6If further work is to be done in the GUI, restart it.

NOTE

SThe Logout item on the BTS menu bar will only log you out of the

displayed BTS.

SYou can also log out of all BTS sessions and exit LMF by clicking

on the File selection in the menu bar and selecting Exit from the

File menu list. A Confirm Logout pop–up message will appear.

Using the LMF 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-30

Logging Out of a BTS from the CLI Environment

Follow the procedure in Table 3-9 to logout of a BTS when using the

CLI environment.

Table 3-9: BTS CLI Logout Procedure

nStep Action

NOTE

If the BTS is also logged into from a GUI running at the same time

and further work must be done with it in the GUI, proceed to Step 2.

1Log out of a BTS by entering the following command:

logout bts–<bts#>

A response similar to the following will be displayed:

LMF>

13:24:51.028 Command Received and Accepted

COMMAND=logout bts–33

13:24:51.028 Command In Progress

13:24:52.04 Command Successfully Completed

REASON_CODE=”No Reason”

2If desired, close the CLI interface by entering the following

command:

exit

A response similar to the following will be displayed before the

window closes:

Killing background processes....

Using the LMF68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-31

Establishing an MMI Communication Session

Equipment Connection – Figure 3-8 illustrates common equipment

connections for the LMF computer. For specific connection locations on

FRUs, refer to the illustration accompanying the procedures which

require the MMI communication session.

Initiate MMI Communication – For those procedures which require

MMI communication between the LMF and BTS FRUs, follow the

procedures in Table 3-10 to initiate the communication session.

Table 3-10: Establishing MMI Communication

Step Action

1Connect the LMF computer to the equipment as detailed in the applicable procedure which requires

the MMI communication session.

2If the LMF computer has only one serial port (COM1) and the LMF is running, disconnect the LMF

from COM1 by performing the following:

2a – Click on Tools in the LMF window menu bar, and select Options from the pull–down menu list.

–– An LMF Options dialog box will appear.

2b – In the LMF Options dialog box, click the Disconnect Port button on the Serial Connection tab.

3Start the named HyperTerminal connection for MMI sessions by double clicking on its Windows

desktop shortcut.

NOTE

If a Windows desktop shortcut was not created for the MMI connection, access the connection from the

Windows Start menu by selecting:

Programs > Accessories > Hyperterminal > HyperTerminal > <Named HyperTerminal

Connection (e.g., MMI Session)>

4Once the connection window opens, establish MMI communication with the BTS FRU by pressing

the LMF computer <Enter>key until the prompt identified in the applicable procedure is obtained.

Using the LMF 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-32

Figure 3-8: LMF Computer Common MMI Connections

NULL MODEM

BOARD

(TRN9666A)

8–PIN TO 10–PIN

RS–232 CABLE

(P/N 30–09786R01)

RS–232 CABLE

8–PIN

LMF

COMPUTER

To FRU MMI port

DB9–TO–DB25

ADAPTER

COM1

COM2

FW00687

Online Help

Task oriented online help is available in the LMF by clicking on Help in

the window menu bar, and selecting LMF Help from the pull–down

menu.

Pinging the Processors68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-33

Pinging the Processors

Pinging the BTS

For proper operation, the integrity of the Ethernet LAN A and B links

must be verified. Figure 3-9 represents a typical BTS Ethernet

configuration for an SC4812T Lite stand–alone or companion frame.

The drawing depicts cabling and termination for both the A and B

LANs.

Ping is a program that sends request data packets to hosts on a network,

in this case GLI modules on the BTS LAN, to obtain a response from the

“target” host specified by an IP address.

Follow the steps in Table 3-11 to ping each processor (on both LAN A

and LAN B) and verify LAN redundancy is working properly.

CAUTION Always wear an approved anti–static wrist strap while handling

any circuit card/module to prevent damage by Electro–Static

Discharge (ESD).

Figure 3-9: BTS Ethernet LAN Termination Diagram

SIGNAL

GROUND

SIGNAL

GROUND

50Ω

SIGNAL

GROUND

50Ω

SIGNAL

GROUND

50Ω

SIGNAL

GROUND

FRAME GROUND

TRIAX

TERMINATOR

TRIAX

TERMINATOR

TRIAX

TERMINATOR

OUT

SC4812TL0013–5

TRIAX

TERMINATOR

SC4812T- Lite I/O

Interconnect Panel

Pinging the Processors 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-34

NOTE The Ethernet LAN A and B cables and/or terminations must be

installed on each frame/enclosure external LAN connector before

performing this test. All other processor board LAN connections

are made through the backplanes.

Table 3-11: Pinging the Processors

Step Action

1If this is a first–time communication with a newly–installed frame or a GLI card which has been

replaced, perform the procedure in Table 6-3 and then return to step 2.

2Be sure any uncabled LAN A and B IN and OUT connectors in the power entry compartment (rear of

frame – NO TAG and Figure 3-9) are terminated with 50 Ω loads.

3If it has not already been done, connect the LMF computer to the BTS (refer to Table 3-5 and

Figure 3-3.)

4If it has not already been done, start a GUI LMF session and log into the BTS ( refer to Table 3-6).

5In the power entry compartment, remove the 50Ω termination on the frame LAN B IN connector.

– The LMF session should remain active.

6Replace the 50Ω terminator on the BTS frame LAN B IN connector.

7From the Windows desktop, click the Start button and select Run.

8In the Open box, type ping and the MGLI IP address (for example, ping 128.0.0.2).

NOTE

128.0.0.2 is the default IP address for the GLI card in slot GLI–1 in field BTS units.

9Click on OK.

10 If the targeted module responds, a DOS window will appear with a display similar to the following:

Reply from 128.0.0.2: bytes=32 time=3ms TTL=255

– If the device responds, proceed to step 18.

If there is no response, the following is displayed:

Request timed out

– If the GLI fails to respond, it should be reset and re–pinged. If it still fails to respond, typical

problems would be: failure of the LMF to login, shorted BNC–to–inter-frame cabling, open

cables, crossed A and B link cables, or the GLI itself.

11 Logout of the BTS as described in Table 3-8, exit from the LMF program, and restart the Windows

operating system on the LMF computer.

12 Restart the LMF GUI program as described in LMF Help function on–line documentation, and log into

the BTS as described in Table 3-6.

13 Perform steps 7 through 10 again.

– If the device responds, proceed to step 18.

If there is still no response, proceed to step 14.

14 If ping was unsuccessful after restarting the LMF computer, press the MGLI front panel reset

pushbutton and perform steps 7 through 10 again.

NOTE

Refer to Table 6-1 if ping was unsuccessful after resetting the MGLI.

. . . continued on next page

Pinging the Processors68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-35

Table 3-11: Pinging the Processors

Step Action

15 After the BTS has been successfully pinged, be sure the 50Ω termination was replaced on the BTS

frame LAN B IN connector in the power entry compartment (Figure 3-9). Disconnect the LMF cable

from the LAN shelf LAN A connector, and connect it to LAN B (right–hand connector) (refer to

Figure 3-3).

16 In the power entry compartment, remove the 50Ω termination on the BTS frame LAN A IN connector.

17 Repeat steps 5 through 9 using LAN B.

18 After the BTS has been successfully pinged on the secondary LAN, replace the 50Ω termination on

the frame LAN A IN connector in the power entry compartment.

19 Disconnect the LMF cable from the LAN shelf LAN B and connect it to LAN A.

20 Remove and replace the 50Ω termination on the LAN B IN connector to force the MGLI to switch to

primary LAN A.

21 Repeat steps 5 through 9 to ensure proper primary LAN operation.

Download the BTS 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-36

Download the BTS

Overview

Before a BTS can operate, each equipped device must contain device

initialization (ROM) code. ROM code is loaded in all devices during

manufacture, factory repair, or, for software upgrades, from the CBSC

using the DownLoad Manager (DLM). Device application (RAM) code

and data must be downloaded to each equipped device by the user before

the BTS can be made fully functional for the site where it is installed.

ROM Code

Downloading ROM code to BTS devices from the LMF is NOT routine

maintenance or a normal part of the optimization process. It is only

done in unusual situations where the resident ROM code release level in

the device is not compatible with the required release level of the site

operating software and the CBSC can not communicate with the BTS to

perform the download.

If you must download ROM code, the procedures are located in

Appendix G.

Before ROM code can be downloaded from the LMF, the correct ROM

code file for each device to be loaded must exist on the LMF computer.

ROM code must be manually selected for download.

NOTE The ROM code file is not available for GLI3s. GLI3s are ROM

code loaded at the factory.

ROM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After the

download is started, the device being downloaded will change to

OOS_ROM (blue). The device will remain OOS_ROM (blue) when the

download is completed. A compatible revision–level RAM code must

then be downloaded to the device. Compatible code loads for ROM and

RAM must be used for the device type to ensure proper performance.

The compatible device code release levels for the BSS software release

being used are listed in the Version Matrix section of the SCt CDMA

Release Notes (supplied on the tape or CD–ROM containing the BSS

software).

RAM Code

Before RAM code can be downloaded from the LMF, the correct RAM

code file for each device must exist on the LMF computer. RAM code

can be automatically or manually selected depending on the Device

menu item chosen and where the RAM code file for the device is stored

in the LMF file structure. The RAM code file will be selected

automatically if the file is in the <x>:\<lmf home

directory>\cdma\loads\n.n.n.n\code folder (where n.n.n.n is the

download code version number that matches the “NextLoad” parameter

of the CDF file). The RAM code file in the code folder must have the

correct hardware bin number for the device to be loaded.

RAM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After the

download is started, the device being loaded will change to OOS_ROM

(blue). When the download is completed successfully, the device will

change to OOS_RAM (yellow).

Download the BTS68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-37

When code is downloaded to an MGLI or GLI, the LMF automatically

also downloads data and then enables the MGLI. When enabled, the

MGLI will change to INS_ACT (bright green). A redundant GLI will

not be automatically enabled and will remain OOS_RAM (yellow).

When the redundant GLI is manually commanded to enable through the

LMF, it will change state to INS_SBY (olive green).

For non–GLI devices, data must be downloaded after RAM code is

downloaded. To download data, the device state must be OOS_RAM

(yellow).

The devices to be loaded with RAM code and data are:

SMaster Group Line Interface (MGLI2 or MGLI3)

SRedundant GLI (GLI2 or GLI3)

SClock Synchronization Module (CSM) (Only if new revision code

must be loaded)

SMulti Channel CDMA (MCC24E, MCC8E, or MCC–1X) cards

SBroadband Transceiver (BBX2 or BBX–1X) cards

SRFDS Test Subscriber Interface Card (TSIC) or RFDS–1X RFDS

PROCessor (RPROC) card, if RFDS is installed

NOTE The MGLI must be successfully downloaded with RAM code

and data, and in INS_ACT (bright green) status before

downloading any other device. The RAM code download

process for an MGLI automatically downloads data and then

enables the MGLI.

Download the BTS 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-38

Verify GLI ROM Code Loads

Devices should not be loaded with a RAM code version which is not

compatible with the ROM code with which they are loaded. Before

downloading RAM code and data to the processor cards, follow the

procedure in Table 3-12 to verify the GLI devices are loaded with the

correct ROM code for the software release used by the BSS.

Prerequisite

Identify the correct GLI ROM code load for the software release being

used on the BSS by referring to the Version Matrix section of the SCt

CDMA Release Notes (supplied on the tapes or CD–ROMs containing

the BSS software).

Table 3-12: Verify GLI ROM Code Loads

Step Action

1If it has not already been done, start a GUI LMF session and log into the

BTS ( refer to Table 3-6).

2Select all GLI devices by clicking on them, and select Device > Status

from the BTS menu bar.

3In the status report window which opens, note the number in the ROM

Ver column for each GLI2.

4If the ROM code loaded in the GLIs is not the correct one for the software

release being used on the BSS, perform the following:

4a – Log out of the BTS as described in Table 3-8 or Table 3-9, as

applicable.

4b – Disconnect the LMF computer.

4c – Reconnect the span lines as described in Table 5-7.

4d – Have the CBSC download the correct ROM code version to the BTS

devices.

5When the GLIs have the correct ROM load for the software release being

used, be sure the span lines are disabled as outlined in Table 3-4 and

proceed to downloading RAM code and data.

Download the BTS68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-39

Download RAM Code and Data to MGLI and GLI

Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-13 to download the RAM code and

data to the MGLI and other installed GLI devices.

Prerequisites

SPrior to performing these procedures, ensure a code file exists for each

of the devices to be loaded.

SThe LMF computer is connected to the BTS (refer to Table 3-5), and

is logged in using the GUI environment (refer to Table 3-6).

Table 3-13: Download and Enable MGLI and GLI Devices

nStep Action

1Be sure the LMF will use the correct software release for code and

data downloads by performing the following steps:

1a – Click on Tools in the LMF menu bar, and select Update

NextLoad > CDMA from the pull–down menus.

1b – Click on the BTS to be loaded.

–– The BTS will be highlighted.

1c – Click the button next to the correct code version for the software

release being used.

–– A black dot will appear in the button circle.

1d – Click Save.

1e – Click OK to close each of the advisory boxes which appear.

2Prepare to download code to the MGLI by clicking on the device.

3 Click Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Download >

Code/Data in the pull–down menus.

– A status report is displayed confirming change in the device(s)

status.

4 Click OK to close the status window.

– The MGLI will automatically be downloaded with data and

enabled.

5Once the MGLI is enabled, load and enable additional installed GLIs

by clicking on the devices and repeating Steps 3 and 4.

6 Click OK to close the status window for the additional GLI devices.

Download the BTS 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-40

Download RAM Code and Data to Non–GLI Devices

Downloads to non–GLI devices can be performed individually for each

device or all installed devices can be downloaded with one action.

NOTE – CSM devices are RAM code–loaded at the factory. RAM

code is downloaded to CSMs only if a newer software

version needs to be loaded.

– When downloading to multiple devices, the download may

fail for some of the devices (a time–out occurs). These

devices can be loaded individually after completing the

multiple download.

Follow the steps in Table 3-14 to download RAM code and data to

non–GLI devices.

Table 3-14: Download RAM Code and Data to Non–GLI Devices

nStep Action

1Select the target CSM, MCC, and/or BBX device(s) by clicking on

them.

2 Click Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Download >

Code/Data in the pull–down menus.

– A status report is displayed that shows the results of the

download for each selected device.

3 Click OK to close the status report window when downloading is

completed.

NOTE

After a BBX, CSM, or MCC device is successfully loaded with RAM

code and data have changed to the OOS_RAM state (yellow), the

status LED should be rapidly flashing GREEN.

NOTE

The command in Step 2 loads both code and data. Data can be

downloaded without doing a code download anytime a device is

OOS–RAM using the command in Step 4.

4To download just the firmware application data to each device, select

the target device and select: Device>Download>Data

BBX Cards Remain OOS_ROM

If BBX cards remain OOS_ROM (blue) after power–up or following

code load, refer to Table 6-7, Steps 9 and 10.

Download the BTS68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-41

Selecting CSM Clock Source and Enabling CSMs

CSMs must be enabled prior to enabling the MCCs. Procedures in the

following two sub-sections cover the actions to accomplish this. For

additional information on the CSM sub–system, see “Clock

Synchronization Manager (CSM) Sub–system Description” in the CSM

System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification section of this chapter.

Select CSM Clock Source

A CSM can have three different clock sources. The Select CSM Source

function can be used to select the clock source for each of the three

inputs. This function is only used if the clock source for a CSM needs to

be changed. The Clock Source function provides the following clock

source options.

SLocal GPS

SMate GPS

SRemote GPS

SHSO (only for source 2 & 3)

SHSO Extender

SLFR (only for source 2 & 3)

S10 MHz (only for source 2 & 3)

SNONE (only for source 2 & 3)

Prerequisites

SMGLI is INS_ACT (bright green)

SCSM is OOS_RAM (yellow) or INS_ACT (bright green)

Follow the procedure in Table 3-15 to select a CSM Clock Source.

Table 3-15: Select CSM Clock Source

nStep Action

1Select the applicable CSM(s) for which the clock source is to be

selected.

2Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select CSM/MAWI >

Select Clock Source... in the pull–down menu list.

– A CSM clock reference source selection window will appear.

3Select the applicable clock source in the Clock Reference Source

pick lists. Uncheck the related check boxes for Clock Reference

Sources 2 and 3 if you do not want the displayed pick list item to be

used.

4Click on the OK button.

– A status report is displayed showing the results of the operation.

5Click on the OK button to close the status report window.

NOTE For RF–GPS, verify the CSM configured with the GPS receiver

“daughter board” is installed in the frame’s CSM 1 slot before

continuing.

Download the BTS 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-42

Enable CSMs

Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-16 to enable the CSMs installed in

the SCCP shelves.

Table 3-16: Enable CSMs

nStep Action

1NOTE

If equipped with two CSMs, enable card in slot CSM 2 first.

Click on the target CSM.

2Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Enable in the pull–down menu list.

– A status report is displayed showing the results of the enable operation.

– Click OK to close the status report window.

NOTE

– The board in slot CSM 1 interfaces with the GPS receiver. The enable sequence for this board can

take up to one hour (see below).

– FAIL may be shown in the status report table for a slot CSM 1 enable action. If Waiting For Phase

Lock is shown in the Description field, do not cancel the enable process. The CSM will change to

the Enabled state after phase lock is achieved.

* IMPORTANT

– The GPS satellite system satellites are not in a geosynchronous orbit and are maintained and

operated by the United States Department of Defense (DOD). The DOD periodically alters

satellite orbits; therefore, satellite trajectories are subject to change. A GPS receiver that is INS

contains an “almanac” that is updated periodically to take these changes into account.

– If a GPS receiver has not been updated for a number of weeks, it may take up to an hour for the

GPS receiver “almanac” to be updated.

– Once updated, the GPS receiver must track at least four satellites and obtain (hold) a 3–D position

fix for a minimum of 45 seconds before the CSM will come in service. (In some cases, the GPS

receiver needs to track only one satellite, depending on accuracy mode set during the data load).

NOTE

– If two CSMs are installed and the board in slot CSM 1 has enabled, the LMF CSM cage view

should show slot CSM 1 as bright green (INS–ACT) and slot CSM 2 as dark green (INS–SBY)

– After CSMs have been successfully enabled, be sure the PWR/ALM LEDs are steady green

(alternating green/red indicates the card is in an alarm state).

3If more than an hour has passed without the board in slot CSM 1 enabling, refer to the CSM System

Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification section of this chapter (see Table 3-18, Figure 3-10, and

Table 3-19) to determine the cause.

Download the BTS68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-43

Enable MCCs

This procedure configures the MCC and sets the “tx fine adjust”

parameter. The “tx fine adjust” parameter is not a transmit gain setting,

but a timing adjustment that compensates for the processing delay in the

BTS (approximately 3 mS).

Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-17 to enable the MCCs installed in

the SCCP shelves.

NOTE The MGLI and primary CSM must be downloaded and enabled

(IN–SERVICE ACTIVE), prior to downloading and enabling an

MCC.

Table 3-17: Enable MCCs

nStep Action

1If the GLI/MCC/BBX view is not displayed in the LMF window, click

on the GLI/MCC/BBX area of the SCCP shelf.

2Click on the target MCC(s), or click on Select in the BTS menu bar,

and select MCCs in the pull–down menu list.

3Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Enable in the

pull–down menu list.

– A status report is displayed showing the results of the enable

operation.

4 Click OK to close the status report window.

CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-44

CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification

Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM) Sub–system Description

Overview – Each BTS CSM sub–system features two CSM boards per

RFMF. The primary function of the CSM cards is to maintain CDMA

system time. GPS is used as the primary timing reference and

synchronizes the entire cellular system. In typical operation, the primary

CSM locks its Digital Phase Locked Loop (DPLL) circuits to GPS

signals. These signals are provided by either an on–board GPS receiver

module (RF–GPS) or a remote GPS receiver (RGPS). RGPS uses a GPS

receiver in the antenna head that has a digital output. The second

generation CSM card (CSM–II) is required when using the RGPS. A

CSM–II card can also be equipped with a local GPS receiver daughter

card to support an RF–GPS signal.

SCCP Shelf CSM Card Slot Assignments – The GPS receiver is

interfaced to the board in SCCP shelf slot CSM 1. This card is the

primary timing source, while the card in slot CSM 2 provides

redundancy. The redundant card, does not have a GPS receiver.

CSM–II Card Type Description – Each CSM–II card features a

temperature–stabilized crystal oscillator that provides 19.6608 MHz

clock, even second pulse, and 3 MHz reference signals to the

synchronization source selected from the following (refer to Table 3-19

for source selection/verification procedures):

SGPS: local/RF–GPS or remote/RGPS

SLORAN–C Low Frequency Receiver (LFR) or High Stability

Oscillator (HSO)

SExternal reference oscillator sources

CDMA Clock Distribution Card (CCD) Description – CCD cards

buffer and distribute even–second reference and 19.6608 MHz clock

signals from the CSM cards. CCD 1 is married to the card in slot CSM

1, and CCD 2 is married to the card in slot CSM 2.

CSM Card Redundancy – The BTS switches between the primary and

redundant units (card slots CSM 1 and CSM 2, respectively) upon failure

or command. A failure in CSM 1 or CCD 1 will cause the system to

switch to the CSM 2–CCD 2 redundant card pair. GPS timing

synchronization is continually maintained between the primary and

redundant CSM–CCD pairs.

Secondary Timing References – The BTS may be equipped with a

LORAN–C Low Frequency Receiver (LFR), a High Stability Oscillator

(HSO), or external 10 MHz Rubidium source which the CSM can use as

a secondary timing reference. Continuous GPS synchronization is

maintained for the LFR or HSO secondary timing references. The CSM

monitors and determines what reference to use at a given time.

CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-45

Timing Source Fault Management – Fault management has the

capability of switching between the GPS synchronization source and the

LFR/HSO backup source in the event of a GPS receiver failure. During

normal operation, the card in slot CSM 1 selects GPS as the primary

timing source (Table 3-19). The source selection can also be overridden

via the LMF or by the system software.

Front Panel LEDs

The status of the LEDs on the CSM boards are as follows:

SSteady Green – Master CSM locked to GPS or LFR (INS).

SRapidly Flashing Green – Standby CSM locked to GPS or LFR

(STBY).

SFlashing Green/Rapidly Flashing Red – CSM OOS–RAM attempting

to lock on GPS signal.

SRapidly Flashing Green and Red – Alarm condition exists. Trouble

Notifications (TNs) are currently being reported to the GLI.

CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-46

Low Frequency Receiver/High Stability Oscillator (LFR/HSO)

General

The CSM and the LFR/HSO – The CSM performs the overall

configuration and status monitoring functions for the LFR/HSO. In the

event of GPS failure, the LFR/HSO is capable of maintaining

synchronization initially established by the GPS reference signal.

LFR – The LFR requires an active external antenna to receive

LORAN–C RF signals. Timing pulses are derived from this signal,

which is synchronized to Universal Time Coordinates (UTC) and GPS

time. The LFR can maintain system time indefinitely after initial GPS

lock.

HSO – The HSO is a high stability 10 MHz oscillator with the necessary

interface to the CSMs. The HSO is typically installed in those

geographical areas not covered by the LORAN–C system. Since the

HSO is a free–standing oscillator, system time can only be maintained

for 24 hours after 24 hours of GPS lock

Upgrades and Expansions: LFR2/HSO2/HSOX

The LFR2 and HSO2 (second generation cards) both can export a timing

signal to other BTS frames located at a site. These secondary frames

require an HSO–expansion (HSOX) module whether the primary frame

has an LFR2 or an HSO2. The HSOX accepts input from the primary

frame and interfaces with the CSM cards in the secondary frames. LFR

and LFR2 use the same source code in source selection (Table 3-19).

HSO, HSO2, and HSOX use the same source code in source selection

(Table 3-19).

NOTE Allow the base site and test equipment to warm up for 60

minutes after any interruption in oscillator power. CSM card

warm-up allows the oscillator oven temperature and oscillator

frequency to stabilize prior to test. Test equipment warm-up

allows the Rubidium standard time base to stabilize in frequency

before any measurements are made.

CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-47

CSM Frequency Verification

The objective of this procedure is the initial verification of the Clock

Synchronization Module (CSM) cards before performing the RF path

verification tests.

Test Equipment Setup

(GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)

Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-18 to set up test equipment.

Table 3-18: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)

Step Action

1Perform one of the following as required by installed equipment:

1a – For local GPS (RF–GPS): Verify a CSM card with a GPS receiver is installed in the primary

CSM slot, CSM 1, and that the card is INS_ACT (bright green).

NOTE

Verify by checking the card ejectors for kit number SGLN1145 on the card in slot CSM 1.

1b – For Remote GPS (RGPS): Verify a CSM–II card is installed in primary slot CSM 1 and that the

card is INS_ACT (bright green).

NOTE

Verify by checking the card ejectors for kit number SGLN4132ED or subsequent.

2Remove the card from slot CSM 2 (if installed) and connect a serial cable from the LMF COM 1 port

(via null modem card) to the MMI port on the card in slot CSM 1 (see Figure 3-10).

3Reinstall the card removed from slot CSM 2.

4Start an MMI communication session with the card in slot CSM 1 by using the Windows desktop

shortcut icon (see Table 3-10) .

5When the terminal screen appears press the Enter key until the CSM> prompt appears.

CAUTION In the power entry compartment, connect the GPS antenna to the

RF GPS connector ONLY. Damage to the GPS antenna and/or

receiver can result if the GPS antenna is inadvertently connected

to any other RF connector.

CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-48

Figure 3-10: CSM MMI Terminal Connection

NULL MODEM

BOARD

(TRN9666A)

RS–232 SERIAL

MODEM CABLE

DB9–TO–DB25

ADAPTER

COM1

LMF

NOTEBOOK

FW00372

CSM card shown

removed from frame

19.6 MHZ TEST

POINT REFERENCE

(NOTE 1)

EVEN SECOND

TICK TEST POINT

REFERENCE

GPS RECEIVER

ANTENNA INPUT

GPS RECEIVER

MMI SERIAL

PORT

ANTENNA COAX

CABLE

REFERENCE

OSCILLATOR

9–PIN TO 9–PIN

RS–232 CABLE

NOTES:

1. One LED on each CSM:

Green = IN–SERVICE ACTIVE

Fast Flashing Green = OOS–RAM

Red = Fault Condition

Flashing Green & Red = Fault

GPS Initialization/Verification

Prerequisites

Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:

SThe primary CSM and HSO (if equipped) has been warmed up for at

least 15 minutes.

SThe LMF computer is connected to the MMI port of the primary CSM

as shown in Figure 3-10.

SAn MMI communication session has been started (Table 3-10), and

the CSM> prompt is present in the HyperTerminal window

(Table 3-18).

Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-19 to initialize and verify proper

GPS receiver functioning.

CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-49

Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/Verification

Step Action

1To verify that Clock alarms (0000), Dpll is locked and has a reference source, and

GPS self test passed messages are displayed within the report, issue the following MMI

command

bstatus

– The system will display a response similar to the following:

Clock Alarms (0000):

DPLL is locked and has a reference source.

GPS receiver self test result: passed

Time since reset 0:33:11, time since power on: 0:33:11

2Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to display the current status of the Loran and GPS

receivers:

sources

– When equipped with LFR, the system will generate a response similar to the following:

N Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

0LocalGPS Primary 4 YES Good 00Yes

1 LFR CHA Secondary 4 YES Good –2013177 –2013177 Yes

2 Not Used

Current reference source number: 0

– When equipped with HSO, the system will generate a response similar to the following:

Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid

––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good 3 0 Yes

1HSO Backup 4 No N/A timed–out* Timed–out* No

*NOTE “Timed–out” should only be displayed while the HSO is warming up. “Not–Present” or

“Faulty” should not be displayed. If the HSO does not appear as one of the sources, then configure the

HSO as a back–up source by entering the following command at the CSM> prompt:

ss 1 12

After a maximum of 15 minutes, the Rubidium oscillator should reach operational temperature and the

LED on the HSO should now have changed from red to green. After the HSO front panel LED has

changed to green, enter sources <cr> at the CSM> prompt. Verify that the HSO is now a valid source

by confirming that the bold text below matches the response of the “sources” command.

The HSO should be valid within one (1) minute, assuming the DPLL is locked and the HSO rubidium

oscillator is fully warmed.

Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid

0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good 3 0 Yes

1HSO Backup 4 Yes N/A xxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxx Yes

. . . continued on next page

CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-50

Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/Verification

Step Action

3HSO information (underlined text above, verified from left to right) is usually the #1 reference source.

If this is not the case, have the OMCR determine the correct BTS timing source has been identified in

the database by entering the display bts csmgen command and correct as required using the edit

csm csmgen refsrc command.

NOTE

If any of the above areas fail, verify:

– If LED is RED, verify that HSO had been powered up for at least 5 minutes. After oscillator

temperature is stable, LED should go GREEN Wait for this to occur before continuing !

– If “timed out” is displayed in the Last Phase column, suspect the HSO output buffer or oscillator

is defective

– Verify the HSO is FULLY SEATED and LOCKED to prevent any possible card warpage

4Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above):

– GPS information is usually the 0 reference source.

– At least one Primary source must indicate “Status = good” and “Valid = yes” to bring site up.

. . . continued on next page

CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-51

Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/Verification

Step Action

5Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to verify that the GPS receiver is in tracking mode.

gstatus

– Observe the following typical response:

24:06:08 GPS Receiver Control Task State: tracking satellites.

24:06:08 Time since last valid fix: 0 seconds.

24:06:08

24:06:08 Recent Change Data:

24:06:08 Antenna cable delay 0 ns.

24:06:08 Initial position: lat 117650000 msec, lon –350258000 msec, height 0 cm (GPS)

24:06:08 Initial position accuracy (0): estimated.

24:06:08

24:06:08 GPS Receiver Status:

24:06:08 Position hold: lat 118245548 msec, lon –350249750 msec, height 20270 cm

24:06:08 Current position: lat 118245548 msec, lon –350249750 msec, height 20270 cm

(GPS)

24:06:08 8 satellites tracked, receiving 8 satellites, 8 satellites visible.

24:06:08 Current Dilution of Precision (PDOP or HDOP): 0.

24:06:08 Date & Time: 1998:01:13:21:36:11

24:06:08 GPS Receiver Status Byte: 0x08

24:06:08 Chan:0, SVID: 16, Mode: 8, RSSI: 148, Status: 0xa8

24:06:08 Chan:1, SVID: 29, Mode: 8, RSSI: 132, Status: 0xa8

24:06:08 Chan:2, SVID: 18, Mode: 8, RSSI: 121, Status: 0xa8

24:06:08 Chan:3, SVID: 14, Mode: 8, RSSI: 110, Status: 0xa8

24:06:08 Chan:4, SVID: 25, Mode: 8, RSSI: 83, Status: 0xa8

24:06:08 Chan:5, SVID: 3, Mode: 8, RSSI: 49, Status: 0xa8

24:06:08 Chan:6, SVID: 19, Mode: 8, RSSI: 115, Status: 0xa8

24:06:08 Chan:7, SVID: 22, Mode: 8, RSSI: 122, Status: 0xa8

24:06:08

24:06:08 GPS Receiver Identification:

24:06:08 SFTW P/N # 98–P36830P

24:06:08 SOFTWARE VER # 8

24:06:08 SOFTWARE REV # 8

24:06:08 SOFTWARE DATE 6 AUG 1996

24:06:08 MODEL # B3121P1115

24:06:08 HDWR P/N # _

24:06:08 SERIAL # SSG0217769

24:06:08 MANUFACTUR DATE 6B07

24:06:08 OPTIONS LIST IB

24:06:08 The receiver has 8 channels and is equipped with TRAIM.

6Verify the following GPS information (shown above in underlined text):

– At least 4 satellites are tracked, and 4 satellites are visible.

– GPS Receiver Control Task State is “tracking satellites”. Do not continue until this occurs!

– Dilution of Precision indication is not more that 30.

Record the current position base site latitude, longitude, height and height reference (height reference

to Mean Sea Level (MSL) or GPS height (GPS). (GPS = 0 MSL = 1).

. . . continued on next page

CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-52

Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/Verification

Step Action

7If steps 1 through 6 pass, the GPS is good.

NOTE

If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify that:

– If Initial position accuracy is “estimated” (typical), at least 4 satellites must be tracked and

visible (1 satellite must be tracked and visible if actual lat, log, and height data for this site has

been entered into CDF file).

– If Initial position accuracy is “surveyed,” position data currently in the CDF file is assumed to be

accurate. GPS will not automatically survey and update its position.

– The GPS antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.

– GPS antenna connector center conductor measureS approximately +5 Vdc with respect to the

shield.

– There is no more than 4.5 dB of loss between the GPS antenna OSX connector and the BTS frame

GPS input.

– Any lightning protection installed between GPS antenna and BTS frame is installed correctly.

8Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to verify that the CSM is warmed up and that GPS

acquisition has taken place.

debug dpllp

Observe the following typical response if the CSM is not warmed up (15 minutes from application of

power) (If warmed–up proceed to step 9)

CSM>DPLL Task Wait. 884 seconds left.

DPLL Task Wait. 882 seconds left.

DPLL Task Wait. 880 seconds left. ...........etc.

NOTE

The warm command can be issued at the MMI port used to force the CSM into warm–up, but the

reference oscillator will be unstable.

9Observe the following typical response if the CSM is warmed up.

c:17486 off: –11, 3, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 3 S1:–2013175,–2013175

c:17470 off: –11, 1, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 1 S1:–2013175,–2013175

c:17486 off: –11, 3, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 3 S1:–2013175,–2013175

c:17470 off: –11, 1, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 1 S1:–2013175,–2013175

10 Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above, from left to right):

– Lower limit offset from tracked source variable is not less than –60 (equates to 3µs limit).

– Upper limit offset from tracked source variable is not more than +60 (equates to 3µs limit).

– TK SRC: 0 is selected, where SRC 0 = GPS.

11 Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to exit the debug mode display.

debug dpllp

CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-53

LORAN–C Initialization/Verification

Table 3-20: LORAN–C Initialization/Verification

Step Action Note

1At the CSM> prompt, enter lstatus <cr> to verify that the LFR is in tracking

mode. A typical response is:

mode

A typical response is:

CSM> lstatus <cr>

LFR St ti St t

LFR Station Status:

Clock coherence: 512 >

5930M 51/60 dB 0 S/N Flag:

5930X 52/64 dn –1 S/N Flag:

5990 47/55 dB –6 S/N Flag:

7980M 62/66 dB 10 S/N Fl

This must be greater

than 100 before LFR

becomes a valid source.

7980M 62/66 dB 10 S/N Flag:

7980W 65/69 dB 14 S/N Flag: . PLL Station . >

7980X 48/54 dB –4 S/N Flag:

7980Y 46/58 dB –8 S/N Flag:E

7980Z 60/67 dB 8 S/N Flag:

8290M 50/65 dB 0 S/N Flag

This shows the LFR is

locked to the selected

PLL station.

8290M 50/65 dB 0 S/N Flag:

8290W 73/79 dB 20 S/N Flag:

8290W 58/61 dB 6 S/N Flag:

8970M 89/95 dB 29 S/N Flag:

8970W 62/66 dB 10 S/N Flag:

8970X 73/79 dB 22 S/N Flag:

8970X 73/79 dB 22 S/N Fl

ag:

8970Y 73/79 dB 19 S/N Flag:

8970Z 62/65 dB 10 S/N Flag:

9610M 62/65 dB 10 S/N Fl

9610M 62/65 dB 10 S/N Flag:

9610V 58/61 dB 8 S/N Flag:

9610W 47

49 dB –4 S

N Fla

9610W 47/49 dB –4 S/N Flag:E

9610X 46/57 dB –5 S/N Flag:E

9610Y 48/54 dB –5 S/N Flag:E

9610Z 65/69 dB 12 S/N Flag

9610Z 65/69 dB 12 S/N Flag:

9940M 50/53 dB –1 S/N Flag:S

9940W 49/56 dB –4 S/N Flag:E

9940W 49/56 dB 4 S/N Flag:E

9940Y 46/50 dB–10 S/N Flag:E

9960M 73/79 dB 22 S/N Flag:

9960W 51/60 dB 0 S/N Flag:

9960W 51/60 dB 0 S/N Fl

ag:

9960X 51/63 dB –1 S/N Flag:

9960Y 59/67 dB 8 S/N Flag:

9960Z 89/96 dB 29 S/N Fl

9960Z 89/96 dB 29 S/N Flag:

LFR Task State: lfr locked to station 7980W

LFR Recent Change Data:

Search List: 5930 5990 7980 8290 8970 9940 9610 9960 >

PLL GRI: 7980W

LFR Master, reset not needed, not the reference source.

CSM>

This search list and PLL

data must match the

configuration for the

geographical location

of the cell site.

. . . continued on next page

CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-54

Table 3-20: LORAN–C Initialization/Verification

Step NoteAction

2Verify the following LFR information (highlighted above in boldface type):

– Locate the “dot” that indicates the current phase locked station assignment (assigned by MM).

– Verify that the station call letters are as specified in site documentation as well as M X Y Z

assignment.

– Verify the S/N ratio of the phase locked station is greater than 8.

3At the CSM> prompt, enter sources <cr> to display the current status of the the LORAN receiver.

– Observe the following typical response.

Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid

0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good –3 0 Yes

1 LFR ch A Secondary 4 Yes Good –2013177 –2013177 Yes

2 Not used

Current reference source number: 1

*NOTE “Timed–out” should only be displayed while the LFR is warming up. “Not–Present” or

“Faulty” should not be displayed. If the LFR does not appear as one of the sources, then configure the

LFR as a back–up source by entering the following command at the CSM> prompt:

ss 1 2

4LORAN LFR information (highlighted above in boldface type) is usually the #1 reference source

(verified from left to right).

* IMPORTANT

If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify:

– The LFR antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.

– The antenna pre–amplifier power and calibration twisted pair connections are intact and < 91.4 m

(300 ft) in length.

– A dependable connection to suitable Earth Ground is in place.

– The search list and PLL station for cellsite location are correctly configured .

NOTE

LFR functionality should be verified using the “source” command (as shown in Step 3). Use the

underlined responses on the LFR row to validate correct LFR operation.

5Close the HyperTerminal window.

Test Equipment Set-up68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-55

Test Equipment Set-up

Connecting Test Equipment to the BTS

The following types of test equipment are required to perform calibration

and ATP tests:

SLMF

SCommunications system analyzer model supported by the LMF

SPower meter model supported by the LMF (required when using the

HP 8921A/600 and Advantest R3465 analyzers)

SNon–radiating transmit line termination load

SDirectional coupler and in–line attenuator

SRF cables and adapters

Refer to Table 3-21 for an overview of connections for test equipment

currently supported by the LMF. In addition, see the following figures:

SFigure 3-14, Figure 3-15, and Figure 3-16 show the test set

connections for TX calibration

SFigure 3-17 through Figure 3-22 show the test set connections for

optimization/ATP tests

Test Equipment GPIB Address Settings

All test equipment is controlled by the LMF through an IEEE–488/GPIB

bus. To communicate on the bus, each piece of test equipment must have

a GPIB address set which the LMF will recognize. The standard address

settings used by the LMF for the various types of test equipment items

are as follows:

SSignal generator address: 1

SPower meter address: 13

SCommunications system analyzer: 18

Using the procedures included in the Verifying and Setting GPIB

Addresses section of Appendix F, verify and, if necessary, change the

GPIB address of each piece of employed test equipment to match the

applicable addresses above.

Test Equipment Set-up 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-56

Supported Test Equipment

CAUTION To prevent damage to the test equipment, all transmit (TX) test

connections must be through a 30 dB directional coupler plus a

20 dB in-line attenuator for both the 800 MHz and 1.9 GHz

BTSs.

IS–95A/B Operation

Optimization and ATP testing for IS–95A/B sites or carriers may be

performed using the following test equipment:

SCyberTest

SAdvantest R3267 spectrum analyzer with R3562 signal generator

SAdvantest R3465 spectrum analyzer with R3561L signal generator

and HP–437B or Gigatronics Power Meter

SAgilent E4406A transmitter test set with E4432B signal generator

SAgilent 8935 series E6380A communications test set (formerly HP

8935)

SHewlett–Packard HP 8921 (with CDMA interface and, for 1.9 GHz,

PCS Interface) and HP–437B or Gigatronics Power Meter

SSpectrum Analyzer (HP8594E) – optional

SRubidium Standard Timebase – optional

CDMA2000 1X Operation

Optimization and ATP testing for CDMA2000 1X sites or carriers may

be performed using the following test equipment:

SAdvantest R3267 spectrum analyzer with R3562 signal generator

SAgilent E4406A transmitter test set with E4432B signal generator

SAgilent 8935 series E6380A communications test set (formerly HP

8935) with option 200 or R2K and with E4432B signal generator for

1X FER

Test Equipment Preparation

See Appendix F for specific steps to prepare each type of test set and

power meter to perform calibration and ATP .

Test Equipment Set-up68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-57

Test Equipment Connection Charts

To use the following charts to identify necessary test equipment

connections, locate the communications system analyzer being used in

the COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ANALYZER columns, and read down

the column. Where a dot appears in the column, connect one end of the

test cable to that connector. Follow the horizontal line to locate the end

connection(s), reading up the column to identify the appropriate

equipment and/or BTS connector.

IS–95A/B–only Test Equipment Connections

Table 3-21 depicts the interconnection requirements for currently

available test equipment supporting IS–95A/B only which meets

Motorola standards and is supported by the LMF.

Table 3-21: IS–95A/B–only Test Equipment Interconnection

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ANALYZER ADDITIONAL TEST EQUIPMENT

SIGNAL Cyber–Test Advantest

R3465 HP 8921A HP 8921

W/PCS Power

Meter GPIB

Interface LMF

Attenuator

Directional

Coupler BTS

EVEN SECOND

SYNCHRONIZATION EVEN

SEC REF EVEN SEC

SYNC IN

EVEN

SECOND

SYNC IN

EVEN

SECOND

SYNC IN

19.6608 MHZ

CLOCK TIME

BASE IN

CDMA

TIME BASE

CDMA

TIME BASE

CDMA

TIME BASE

CONTROL

IEEE 488 BUS IEEE

488 GPIB GPIB SERIAL

PORT

HP–I

BHP–IB

TX TEST

CABLES RF

IN/OUT INPUT

50WTX1–6

IN/OUT RF

IN/OUT 20 DB

ATTEN. BTS

PORT

RX TEST

CABLES RF

GEN OUT RF OUT

50WRX1–6

DUPLEX

OUT RF OUT

ONLY

SYNC

MON-

ITOR

FREQ

MON-

ITOR

HP–IB

Test Equipment Set-up 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-58

CDMA2000 1X/IS–95A/B–capable Test Equipment

Connections

Table 3-22 depicts the interconnection requirements for currently

available test equipment supporting both CDMA 2000 1X and

IS–95A/B which meets Motorola standards and is supported by the

LMF.

Table 3-22: CDMA2000 1X/IS–95A/B Test Equipment Interconnection

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM

ANALYZER ADDITIONAL TEST EQUIPMENT

SIGNAL

Agilent

8935

(Option

200 or

R2K) Advantest

R3267 Agilent

E4406A

Agilent

E4432

Signal

Gen.

Advantest

R3562

Signal

Generator Power

Meter GPIB

Interface LMF

Attenuator

Directional

Coupler BTS

EVEN SECOND

SYNCHRONIZATION

EVEN

SECOND

SYNC IN EXT TRIG

19.6608 MHZ

CLOCK

EXT REF

IN MOD TIME

BASE IN

CONTROL

IEEE 488 BUS

10 MHZ

OUT

GP–IBHP–IB GP–IB GPIB SERIAL

PORT

GPIB GPIB

TX TEST

CABLES RF

IN/OUT INPUT

50 WTX1–6

20 DB

ATTEN. BTS

PORT

SYNC

MON-

ITOR

FREQ

MON-

ITOR

HP–IB

PATTERN

TRIG IN

EXT REF

RF INPUT

50 W

RX TEST

CABLES RF OUT

50 W

RF OUTPUT

50 WRX1–6

10 MHZ

10 MHZ OUT

(SWITCHED) SYNTHE

REF IN

10 MHZ

TRIGGER

EXT TRIG

SIGNAL SOURCE

CONTROLLED

SERIAL I/O

SERIAL

I/O SERIAL

I/O

10 MHZ

REF

OUT

IN/OUT

Test Equipment Set-up68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-59

Equipment Warm-up

NOTE Warm-up BTS equipment for a minimum of 60 minutes prior to

performing the BTS optimization procedure. This assures BTS

stability and contributes to optimization accuracy.

– Time spent running initial or normal power-up,

hardware/firmware audit, and BTS download counts as

warm-up time.

WARNING Before installing any test equipment directly to any BTS TX

OUT connector, verify there are no CDMA channels keyed.

– At active sites, have the OMC-R/CBSC place the antenna

(sector) assigned to the BBX under test OOS. Failure to do

so can result in serious personal injury and/or equipment

damage.

Automatic Cable Calibration Set–up

Figure 3-11 and Figure 3-12 show the cable calibration setup for the test

sets supported by the LMF. The left side of the diagram depicts the

location of the input and output connectors of each test equipment item,

and the right side details the connections for each test. Table 3-26

provides a procedure for performing automatic cable calibration.

Manual Cable Calibration

If manual cable calibration is required, refer to the procedures in

Appendix F.

Test Equipment Set-up 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-60

Figure 3-11: IS–95A/B Cable Calibration Test Setup –

CyberTest, Agilent 8935, Advantest R3465, and HP 8921A

Motorola CyberTest

Advantest Model R3465

RF OUT 50Ω

INPUT 50Ω

RF GEN OUTANT IN

SUPPORTED TEST SETS

100–WATT (MIN)

NON–RADIATING

RF LOAD

TEST

SET

A. SHORT CABLE CAL

SHORT

CABLE

B. RX TEST CAL SETUP FOR TRDC

TEST

SET

C. TX TEST AND DRDC RX TEST CAL SETUP

20 DB IN–LINE

ATTENUATOR

CALIBRATION SET UP

N–N FEMALE

ADAPTER

CABLE

SHORT

CABLE

Note: The 30 dB directional coupler is not used

with the Cybertest test set. The TX cable is

connected directly to the Cybertest test set.

A 10dB attenuator must be used with the short test

cable for cable calibration with the CyberTest test

set. The 10dB attenuator is used only for the cable

calibration procedure, not with the test cables for

TX calibration and ATP tests.

TEST

SET

CABLE

SHORT

CABLE

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

(30 DB)

N–N FEMALE

ADAPTER

50 Ω

ΤERM.

Agilent 8935 Series E6380A

(formerly HP 8935)

IN/OUT

ANT

Hewlett Packard Model HP 8921A

Note: For 800 MHZ only. The HP8921A cannot

be used to calibrate cables for PCS frequencies.

TX CABLE FOR

TX TEST CABLE

CALIBRATION

RX CABLE FOR

DRDC RX TEST

CABLE CALIBRATION

DUPLEX

OUT ANT

Test Equipment Set-up68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-61

Figure 3-12: IS–95A/B and CDMA 2000 1X Cable Calibration Test Setup –

Agilent E4406A/E4432B and Advantest R3267/R3562

TEST

SET

A. SHORT CABLE CAL

SHORT

CABLE

B. RX TEST SETUP FOR TRDC

CALIBRATION SET UP

TEST

SET

CABLE

SHORT

CABLE

N–N FEMALE

ADAPTER

SUPPORTED TEST SETS

INPUT 50 Ω

RF OUT

50 Ω

Advantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)

NOTE:

SYNTHE REF IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS

CONNECTED TO 10 MHZ OUT ON REAR OF SPECTRUM

ANALYZER

Agilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)

NOTE:

10 MHZ IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO

10 MHZ OUT (SWITCHED) ON REAR OF TRANSMITTER TESTER

(FIGURE F-16).

RF INPUT

50 Ω

RF OUTPUT

50 Ω

100–WATT (MIN)

NON–RADIATING

RF LOAD

TEST

SET

D. TX TEST SETUP AND DRDC RX TEST SETUP

20 DB IN–LINE

ATTENUATOR

N–N FEMALE

ADAPTER

CABLE

SHORT

CABLE

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

(30 DB)

50 Ω

ΤERM.

TX CABLE FOR

TX TEST CABLE

CALIBRATION

RX CABLE FOR

DRDC RX TEST

CABLE CALIBRATION

Test Equipment Set-up 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-62

Figure 3-13: CDMA2000 1X Cable Calibration Test Setup –

Agilent 8935/E4432B and Agilent E7495A

TEST

SET

A. SHORT CABLE CAL

SHORT

CABLE

B. RX TEST SETUP FOR TRDC

CALIBRATION SET UP

TEST

SET

CABLE

SHORT

CABLE

N–N FEMALE

ADAPTER

SUPPORTED TEST SETS

Agilent E4432B (Top) and 8935 Series

E6380A (Bottom)

NOTE:

10 MHZ IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO

10 MHZ REF OUT ON SIDE OF CDMA BASE STATION TEST SET

(FIGURE F-15).

RF OUTPUT

50 Ω

100–WATT (MIN)

NON–RADIATING

RF LOAD

TEST

SET

D. TX TEST SETUP AND DRDC RX TEST SETUP

20 DB IN–LINE

ATTENUATOR

N–N FEMALE

ADAPTER

CABLE

SHORT

CABLE

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

(30 DB)

50 Ω

ΤERM.

TX CABLE FOR

TX TEST CABLE

CALIBRATION

RX CABLE FOR

DRDC RX TEST

CABLE CALIBRATION

ANT

Agilent E7495A

OUT

Test Equipment Set-up68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-63

Set-up for TX Calibration

Figure 3-14 and Figure 3-15 show the test set connections for TX

calibration.

Figure 3-14: TX Calibration Test Setup –

CyberTest (IS–95A/B) and Agilent 8935 (IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X)

Motorola CyberTest

Agilent 8935 Series E6380A (formerly HP 8935)

TEST SETS TRANSMIT (TX) SET UP

FRONT PANEL

IN/OUT

HP–IB

TO GPIB

BOX

NOTE: THE 30 DB DIRECTIONAL COUPLER IS NOT USED WITH THE

CYBERTEST TEST SET. THE TX CABLE IS CONNECTED DIRECTLY

TO THE CYBERTEST TEST SET.

MPC

TO PA

TRUNKING

MODULE

RS232–GPIB

INTERFACE BOX

INTERNAL PCMCIA

ETHERNET CARD

GPIB

CABLE

UNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)

CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)

RS232 NULL

MODEM

CABLE

S MODE

DATA FORMAT

BAUD RATE

GPIB ADRS G MODE

BTS

INTERNAL

CABLE

CDMA

LMF

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

10BASET/

10BASE2

CONVERTER

LAN

GPIB

RF IN/OUT

ANTENNA

CONNECTOR

FREQ

MONITOR

SYNC

MONITOR

CSM

INTERNAL

CABLE

ANT

CPLD

BTS

CPLD

TRDC

BTS

CPLD

ANT

CPLD

ANTENNA

CONNECTOR

COMMUNICATIONS

SYSTEM ANALYZER

2O DB IN–LINE

ATTENUATOR

50 Ω

TERM

TX TEST

CABLE

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

(30 DB)

100–WATT (MIN.)

NON–RADIATING

RF LOAD

TX TEST

CABLE

* BLACK RECTANGLES

REPRESENT THE RAISED

PART OF SWITCHES

NOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPED

WITH DRDCS (DUPLEXED

RX/TX SIGNALS), CONNECT

THE TX TEST CABLE TO

THE DRDC ANTENNA

CONNECTOR.

POWER

METER

(OPTIONAL)*

POWER

SENSOR

* A POWER METER CAN BE USED IN

PLACE OF THE COMMUNICATIONS

TEST SET FOR TX CALIBRATION/

AUDIT

Test Equipment Set-up 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-64

Figure 3-15: TX Calibration Test Setup – Using Power Meter

TEST SETS TRANSMIT (TX) SET UP

NOTE: THE HP8921A AND ADVANTEST

R3465 CANNOT BE USED FOR TX

CALIBRATION. A POWER METER MUST BE

USED.

MPC

TO PA

TRUNKING

MODULE

RS232–GPIB

INTERFACE BOX

INTERNAL PCMCIA

ETHERNET CARD

GPIB

CABLE

UNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)

CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)

RS232 NULL

MODEM

CABLE

S MODE

DATA FORMAT

BAUD RATE

GPIB ADRS G MODE

BTS

INTERNAL

CABLE

CDMA

LMF

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

10BASET/

10BASE2

CONVERTER

LAN

ANTENNA

CONNECTOR

FREQ

MONITOR

SYNC

MONITOR

CSM

INTERNAL

CABLE

ANT

CPLD

BTS

CPLD

TRDC

BTS

CPLD

ANT

CPLD

ANTENNA

CONNECTOR

50 Ω

TERM

TX TEST

CABLE

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

(30 DB)

100–WATT (MIN.)

NON–RADIATING

RF LOAD

TX TEST

CABLE

* BLACK RECTANGLES

REPRESENT THE RAISED

PART OF SWITCHES

NOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPED

WITH DRDCS (DUPLEXED

RX/TX SIGNALS), CONNECT

THE TX TEST CABLE TO

THE DRDC ANTENNA

CONNECTOR.

POWER

SENSOR POWER METER

2O DB IN–LINE

ATTENUATOR

Test Equipment Set-up68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-65

Figure 3-16: TX Calibration Test Setup –

Agilent E4406A and Advantest R3567 (IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X)

TEST SETS TRANSMIT (TX) SET UP

MPC

TO PA

TRUNKING

MODULE

RS232–GPIB

INTERFACE BOX

INTERNAL PCMCIA

ETHERNET CARD

GPIB

CABLE

UNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)

CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)

RS232 NULL

MODEM

CABLE

S MODE

DATA FORMAT

BAUD RATE

GPIB ADRS G MODE

BTS

INTERNAL

CABLE

CDMA

LMF

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

10BASET/

10BASE2

CONVERTER

LAN

GPIB

RF INPUT 50 Ω

OR INPUT 50 Ω

ANTENNA

CONNECTOR

FREQ

MONITOR

SYNC

MONITOR

CSM

INTERNAL

CABLE

ANT

CPLD

BTS

CPLD

TRDC

BTS

CPLD

ANT

CPLD

ANTENNA

CONNECTOR

COMMUNICATIONS

SYSTEM ANALYZER

50 Ω

TERM

TX TEST

CABLE

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

(30 DB)

100–WATT (MIN.)

NON–RADIATING

RF LOAD

TX TEST

CABLE

* BLACK RECTANGLES

REPRESENT THE RAISED

PART OF SWITCHES

NOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPED

WITH DRDCS (DUPLEXED

RX/TX SIGNALS), CONNECT

THE TX TEST CABLE TO

THE DRDC ANTENNA

CONNECTOR.

POWER

METER

(OPTIONAL)*

POWER

SENSOR

* A POWER METER CAN BE USED IN

PLACE OF THE COMMUNICATIONS

TEST SET FOR TX CALIBRATION/

AUDIT

RF INPUT

50 Ω

Agilent E4406A

INPUT 50 Ω

Advantest R3267

2O DB IN–LINE

ATTENUATOR

Test Equipment Set-up 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-66

Set–up for ATP

Figure 3-17 and Figure 3-18 show the test set connections for ATP tests.

Figure 3-17: IS–95A/B ATP Test Set–up, TRDC Shown –

CyberTest, Advantest R3465, and Agilent 8935

Motorola CyberTest

TEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UP

IN/OUT

SYNC MONITOR

EVEN SEC TICK

PULSE REFERENCE

FROM CSM BOARD

FREQ MONITOR

19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

REFERENCE FROM

CSM BOARD

Advantest Model R3465

INPUT 50Ω

GPIB CONNECTS

TO BACK OF UNIT

NOTE: The 30 dB directional coupler is not

used with the Cybertest test set. The TX

cable is connected directly to the Cybertest

test set.

RF OUT 50Ω

FREQ MONITOR

19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

REFERENCE FROM

CSM BOARD

RF GEN

OUT

SYNC MONITOR EVEN

SEC TICK PULSE

REFERENCE FROM

CSM BOARD

BNC

“T”

TO EXT TRIGGER CONNECTOR

ON REAR OF TEST SET

(FOR DETAILS, SEE

FIGURE F-13)

MPC

TO PA

TRUNKING

MODULE

RS232–GPIB

INTERFACE BOX

INTERNAL PCMCIA

ETHERNET CARD

GPIB

CABLE

UNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)

CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)

RS232 NULL

MODEM

CABLE

S MODE

DATA FORMAT

BAUD RATE

GPIB ADRS G MODE

BTS

INTERNAL

CABLE

CDMA

LMF

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

10BASET/

10BASE2

CONVERTER

LAN

RX TEST

CABLE

GPIB

RF IN/OUT

INPUT 50 Ω

RF GEN OUT,

RF OUT 50Ω,

OR RF IN/OUT

ANTENNA

CONNECTOR

FREQ

MONITOR

SYNC

MONITOR

CSM

INTERNAL

CABLE

ANT

CPLD

BTS

CPLD

TRDC

BTS

CPLD

ANT

CPLD

ANTENNA

CONNECTOR

COMMUNICATIONS

SYSTEM ANALYZER

50 Ω

TERM

TX TEST

CABLE

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

(30 DB)

100–WATT (MIN.)

NON–RADIATING

RF LOAD

TX TEST

CABLE

* BLACK RECTANGLES

REPRESENT THE RAISED

PART OF SWITCHES

CDMA

TIMEBASE

EVEN

SECOND/

SYNC IN

NOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPED

WITH DRDCS (DUPLEXED RX/TX

SIGNALS), BOTH THE TX AND RX

TEST CABLES CONNECT TO THE

DRDC ANTENNA CONNECTOR.

(SEE FIGURE 3-19.)

2O DB IN–LINE

ATTENUATOR

IMPORTANT:

WHEN PERFORMING FER TEST ON COMPANION FRAME DIVERSITY RX, CONNECT

RX TEST CABLE TO RX ANTENNA PORT ON COLLOCATED COMPANION FRAME.

Agilent 8935 Series E6380A (formerly HP 8935)

RF IN/OUT

HP–IB

TO GPIB

BOX

SYNC MONITOR

EVEN SEC TICK

PULSE REFERENCE

FROM CSM BOARD

FREQ MONITOR

19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

REFERENCE FROM

CSM BOARD

10 MHZ

REF OUT

Test Equipment Set-up68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-67

Figure 3-18: IS–95A/B ATP Test Setup – HP 8921A

RF OUT

ONLY

Hewlett Packard Model HP 8921A W/PCS Interface

(for 1900 MHz)

GPIB

CONNECTS

TO BACK OF

UNITS

SYNC MONITOR

EVEN SEC TICK

PULSE REFERENCE

FROM CSM BOARD

FREQ MONITOR

19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

REFERENCE FROM

CSM BOARD

TEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UP

IN/OUT

GPIB

CONNECTS

TO BACK OF

UNIT

SYNC MONITOR

EVEN SEC TICK

PULSE REFERENCE

FROM CSM BOARD

FREQ MONITOR

19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

REFERENCE FROM

CSM BOARD

Hewlett Packard Model HP 8921A

(for 800 MHz)

IN/OUT

DUPLEX

OUT

MPC

TO PA

TRUNKING

MODULE

RS232–GPIB

INTERFACE BOX

INTERNAL PCMCIA

ETHERNET CARD

GPIB

CABLE

UNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)

CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)

RS232 NULL

MODEM

CABLE

S MODE

DATA FORMAT

BAUD RATE

GPIB ADRS G MODE

BTS

INTERNAL

CABLE

CDMA

LMF

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

10BASET/

10BASE2

CONVERTER

LAN

RX TEST

CABLE

GPIB

PCS INTERFACE

INPUT/OUTPUT

PORTS

ANTENNA

CONNECTOR

FREQ

MONITOR

SYNC

MONITOR

CSM

INTERNAL

CABLE

ANT

CPLD

BTS

CPLD

TRDC

BTS

CPLD

ANT

CPLD

ANTENNA

CONNECTOR

COMMUNICATIONS

SYSTEM ANALYZER

50 Ω

TERM

TX TEST

CABLE

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

(30 DB)

100–WATT (MIN.)

NON–RADIATING

RF LOAD

TX TEST

CABLE

* BLACK RECTANGLES

REPRESENT THE RAISED

PART OF SWITCHES

CDMA

TIMEBASE

IN EVEN

SECOND/

SYNC IN

NOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPED

WITH DRDCS (DUPLEXED

RX/TX SIGNALS), BOTH THE

TX AND RX TEST CABLES

CONNECT TO THE DRDC

ANTENNA CONNECTOR.

(SEE FIGURE 3-19.)

HP PCS

INTERFACE*

2O DB IN–LINE

ATTENUATOR

* FOR 1900 MHZ

ONLY

RF OUT ONLY

RF IN/OUT

NOTE:

FOR 800 MHZ TESTING, CONNECT CABLES TO THE

HP 8921A AS FOLLOWS:

RX TEST CABLE TO DUPLEX OUT

TX TEST CABLE TO RF IN/OUT

IMPORTANT:

WHEN PERFORMING FER TEST ON COMPANION FRAME DIVERSITY RX,

CONNECT RX TEST CABLE TO RX ANTENNA PORT ON COLLOCATED COMPANION

FRAME.

Test Equipment Set-up 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-68

Figure 3-19: IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X ATP Test Setup With DRDCs –

Agilent Test Equipment

TEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UP

RF INPUT

50 Ω

OUTPUT

50 Ω

Agilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)

FREQ MONITOR

19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

REFERENCE FROM

CSM BOARD

SYNC MONITOR

EVEN SEC TICK

PULSE REFERENCE

FROM CSM BOARD

BNC

“T”

TO TRIGGER IN

ON REAR OF

TRANSMITTER

TESTER

TO PATTERN TRIG IN

ON REAR OF SIGNAL

GENERATOR

TO EXT REF IN

ON REAR OF

TRANSMITTER

TESTER

NOTE:

10 MHZ IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO

10 MHZ OUT (SWITCHED) ON REAR OF TRANSMITTER TESTER

(SEE FIGURE F-16).

MPC

TO PA

TRUNKING

MODULE

RS232–GPIB

INTERFACE BOX

INTERNAL PCMCIA

ETHERNET CARD

GPIB

CABLE

UNIVERSAL TWISTED

PAIR (UTP) CABLE

(RJ45 CONNECTORS)

RS232 NULL

MODEM

CABLE

S MODE

DATA FORMAT

BAUD RATE

GPIB ADRS G MODE

BTS

INTERNAL

CABLE

CDMA

LMF

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS *

10BASET/

10BASE2

CONVERTER

LAN

COMMUNICATIONS

SYSTEM ANALYZER

HP–IB

GPIB

FREQ

MONITOR

SYNC

MONITOR

CSM

INTERNAL

CABLE

DRDC

BTS

CPLD

ANT

CPLD

SIGNAL GENERATOR

GPIB

10 MHZ

REF OUT

10 MHZ

OUT

TRIGGER IN

EVEN SEC

SYNCH IN

EXT

REF

BNC

“T”

PATTERN

TRIG IN

* BLACK RECTANGLES

REPRESENT THE RAISED

PART OF SWITCHES

DUPLEXED

TX/RX

ANTENNA

CONNECTOR

RX TEST

CABLE

50 Ω

TERM

TX TEST

CABLE

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

(30 DB)

100–WATT (MIN.)

NON–RADIATING

RF LOAD

TX TEST

CABLE

2O DB IN–LINE

ATTENUATOR

RF IN/OUT

RF INPUT

50 Ω

RF OUTPUT 50 Ω

IMPORTANT:

WHEN PERFORMING FER TEST ON

COMPANION FRAME DIVERSITY RX,

CONNECT RX TEST CABLE TO

ANTENNA PORT ON COLLOCATED

COMPANION FRAME.

Agilent E4432B (Top) and 8935 Series E6380A

(Bottom)

SYNC MONITOR

EVEN SEC TICK

PULSE REFERENCE

FROM CSM BOARD

FREQ MONITOR

19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

REFERENCE FROM

CSM BOARD

OUTPUT

50 Ω

NOTES:

10 MHZ IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO

10 MHZ REF OUT ON SIDE OF CDMA BASE STATION TEST SET

PATTERN TRIG IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS

CONNECTED TO EVEN SECOND SYNC IN ON SIDE OF CDMA BASE

STATION TEST SET.

(SEE FIGURE F-15)

IN/OUT

BNC

“T”

Test Equipment Set-up68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-69

Figure 3-20: IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X ATP Test Setup With DRDCs –

Advantest R3267/3562 Test Equipment

TEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UP

INPUT 50 Ω

RF OUT

50 Ω

Advantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)

FREQ MONITOR

19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

REFERENCE FROM

CSM BOARD

SYNC MONITOR

EVEN SEC TICK

PULSE REFERENCE

FROM CSM BOARD

BNC

“T”

NOTE:

SYNTHE REF IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS

CONNECTED TO 10 MHZ REF OUT ON REAR OF

SPECTRUM ANALYZER (SEE FIGURE F-17)

TO EXT TRIG

ON REAR OF

SPECTRUM

ANALYZER

MPC

TO PA

TRUNKING

MODULE

RS232–GPIB

INTERFACE BOX

INTERNAL PCMCIA

ETHERNET CARD

GPIB

CABLE

UNIVERSAL TWISTED

PAIR (UTP) CABLE

(RJ45 CONNECTORS)

RS232 NULL

MODEM

CABLE

S MODE

DATA FORMAT

BAUD RATE

GPIB ADRS G MODE

BTS

INTERNAL

CABLE

CDMA

LMF

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

10BASET/

10BASE2

CONVERTER

LAN

INPUT

50 Ω

RF OUT

50 Ω

FREQ

MONITOR

SYNC

MONITOR

CSM

INTERNAL

CABLE

DRDC

BTS

CPLD

ANT

CPLD

BNC

“T”

SPECTRUM

ANALYZER

GPIB

SIGNAL GENERATOR

GPIB

SYNTHE

REF

10 MHZ

OUT

EXT

TRIG IN

MOD TIME

BASE IN

EXT TRIG

* BLACK RECTANGLES

REPRESENT THE RAISED

PART OF SWITCHES

DUPLEXED

TX/RX

ANTENNA

CONNECTOR

RX TEST

CABLE

50 Ω

TERM

TX TEST

CABLE

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

(30 DB)

100–WATT (MIN.)

NON–RADIATING

RF LOAD

TX TEST

CABLE

2O DB IN–LINE

ATTENUATOR

IMPORTANT:

WHEN PERFORMING FER TEST ON

COMPANION FRAME DIVERSITY RX,

CONNECT RX TEST CABLE TO

ANTENNA PORT ON COLLOCATED

COMPANION FRAME.

Test Equipment Set-up 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-70

Figure 3-21: IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X ATP Test Setup With TRDCs –

Agilent Test Equipment

TEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UP

MPC

TO PA

TRUNKING

MODULE

RS232–GPIB

INTERFACE BOX

INTERNAL PCMCIA

ETHERNET CARD

GPIB

CABLE

UNIVERSAL TWISTED

PAIR (UTP) CABLE

(RJ45 CONNECTORS)

RS232 NULL

MODEM

CABLE

S MODE

DATA FORMAT

BAUD RATE

GPIB ADRS G MODE

BTS

INTERNAL

CABLE

CDMA

LMF

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

10BASET/

10BASE2

CONVERTER

LAN

RX TEST

CABLE

COMMUNICATIONS

SYSTEM ANALYZER

GPIB

RF IN/OUT

OR RF INPUT 50 Ω

RF OUTPUT 50 Ω

ANTENNA

CONNECTOR

FREQ

MONITOR

SYNC

MONITOR

CSM

INTERNAL

CABLE

ANT

CPLD

BTS

CPLD

TRDC

BTS

CPLD

ANT

CPLD

ANTENNA

CONNECTOR

RF INPUT

50 Ω

OUTPUT

50 Ω

Agilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)

FREQ MONITOR

19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

REFERENCE FROM

CSM BOARD

SYNC MONITOR

EVEN SEC TICK

PULSE REFERENCE

FROM CSM BOARD

BNC

“T”

TO TRIGGER IN

ON REAR OF

TRANSMITTER

TESTER

TO PATTERN TRIG IN

ON REAR OF SIGNAL

GENERATOR

TO EXT REF IN

ON REAR OF

TRANSMITTER

TESTER

NOTE:

10 MHZ IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO

10 MHZ OUT (SWITCHED) ON REAR OF TRANSMITTER TESTER

(SEE FIGURE F-16).

SIGNAL GENERATOR

GPIB

10 MHZ

OUT

50 Ω

TERM

TX TEST

CABLE

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

(30 DB)

100–WATT (MIN.)

NON–RADIATING

RF LOAD

TRIGGER IN

EVEN SEC

SYNCH IN

EXT

REF

TX TEST

CABLE

BNC

“T”

PATTERN

TRIG IN

* BLACK RECTANGLES

REPRESENT THE RAISED

PART OF SWITCHES

2O DB IN–LINE

ATTENUATOR

IMPORTANT:

WHEN PERFORMING FER TEST ON COMPANION FRAME DIVERSITY RX, CONNECT RX TEST

CABLE TO RX ANTENNA PORT ON COLLOCATED COMPANION FRAME.

Agilent E4432B (Top) and 8935 Series E6380A

(Bottom)

SYNC MONITOR

EVEN SEC TICK

PULSE REFERENCE

FROM CSM BOARD

FREQ MONITOR

19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

REFERENCE FROM

CSM BOARD

OUTPUT

50 Ω

NOTES:

10 MHZ IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO

10 MHZ REF OUT ON SIDE OF CDMA BASE STATION TEST SET

PATTERN TRIG IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS

CONNECTED TO EVEN SECOND SYNC IN ON SIDE OF CDMA BASE

STATION TEST SET.

(SEE FIGURE F-15)

IN/OUT

BNC

“T”

Test Equipment Set-up68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-71

Figure 3-22: IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X ATP Test Setup With TRDCs –

Advantest R3267/3562 Test Equipment, Agilent E7495A

TEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UP

INPUT 50 Ω

RF OUT

50 Ω

Advantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)

FREQ MONITOR

19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

REFERENCE FROM

CSM BOARD

SYNC MONITOR

EVEN SEC TICK

PULSE REFERENCE

FROM CSM BOARD

BNC

“T”

NOTE:

SYNTHE REF IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS

CONNECTED TO 10 MHZ REF OUT ON REAR OF

SPECTRUM ANALYZER (SEE FIGURE F-17)

TO EXT TRIG

ON REAR OF

SPECTRUM

ANALYZER

MPC

TO PA

TRUNKING

MODULE

RS232–GPIB

INTERFACE BOX

INTERNAL PCMCIA

ETHERNET CARD

GPIB

CABLE

UNIVERSAL TWISTED

PAIR (UTP) CABLE

(RJ45 CONNECTORS)

RS232 NULL

MODEM

CABLE

S MODE

DATA FORMAT

BAUD RATE

GPIB ADRS G MODE

BTS

INTERNAL

CABLE

CDMA

LMF

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

10BASET/

10BASE2

CONVERTER

LAN

RX TEST

CABLE

SPECTRUM

ANALYZER

GPIB

INPUT

50 Ω

RF OUT

50 Ω

ANTENNA

CONNECTOR

FREQ

MONITOR

SYNC

MONITOR

CSM

INTERNAL

CABLE

ANTENNA

CONNECTOR

SIGNAL GENERATOR

GPIB

SYNTHE

REF

10 MHZ

OUT

50 Ω

TERM

TX TEST

CABLE

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

(30 DB)

100–WATT (MIN.)

NON–RADIATING

RF LOAD

EXT

TRIG IN

MOD TIME

BASE IN

TX TEST

CABLE

BNC

“T”

EXT TRIG

* BLACK RECTANGLES

REPRESENT THE RAISED

PART OF SWITCHES

ANT

CPLD

BTS

CPLD

TRDC

BTS

CPLD

ANT

CPLD

2O DB IN–LINE

ATTENUATOR

IMPORTANT:

WHEN PERFORMING FER TEST ON COMPANION FRAME DIVERSITY RX, CONNECT

RX TEST CABLE TO RX ANTENNA PORT ON COLLOCATED COMPANION FRAME.

Agilent E7495A

OUT

SYNC MONITOR

EVEN SEC TICK

PULSE REFERENCE

FROM CSM BOARD

TO “EXT REF IN” –

FREQ MONITOR

19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

REFERENCE FROM

CSM BOARD

Test Set Calibration 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-72

Test Set Calibration

Background

Proper test equipment calibration helps to ensure accurate BTS

optimization and acceptance testing by assuring that the test equipment

and associated cables do not introduce measurement errors.

NOTE If the test equipment set being used to optimize or test the BTS

has been calibrated and maintained as a set, this procedure does

not need to be performed.

This procedure must be performed prior to beginning the optimization.

Verify all test equipment (including all associated cables and adapters

actually used to interconnect test equipment items and the BTS) has been

calibrated and maintained as a set.

CAUTION If any piece of test equipment, test cable, or RF adapter that

makes up the calibrated test equipment set has been replaced, the

set must be re-calibrated. Failure to do so can introduce

measurement errors, resulting in incorrect measurements and

degradation to system performance. Motorola recommends

repeating cable calibration before testing at each BTS site.

NOTE Calibration of the communications system analyzer (or

equivalent test equipment) must be performed at the site before

calibrating the overall test equipment set. Calibrate the test

equipment after it has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for

a a minimum of 60 minutes.

Calibration Procedures Included

Automatic

Procedures included in this section use the LMF automated calibration

routine to determine path losses of the supported communications

analyzer, power meter, associated test cables, adapters, and (if used)

antenna switch that make up the overall calibrated test equipment set.

After calibration, the gain/loss offset values are stored in a test

measurement offset file on the LMF computer.

Manual

Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester – The E4406A does not support

the power level zeroing calibration performed by the LMF. If this

instrument is to be used for Bay Level Offset calibration and calibration

is attempted with the LMF Calibrate Test Equipment function, the

LMF will return a status window failure message stating that zeroing

power is not supported by the E4406A. Refer to the Equipment

Calibration section of Appendix F for instructions on using the

instrument’s self–alignment (calibration) function prior to performing

Bay Level Offset calibration.

Power Meters – Manual power meter calibration procedures to be

performed prior to automated calibration are included in the Equipment

Calibration section of Appendix F.

Test Set Calibration68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-73

Cable Calibration – Manual cable calibration procedures using the HP

8921A and Advantest R3465 communications system analyzers are

provided in the Manual Cable Calibration section of Appendix F, if

needed.

GPIB Addresses

GPIB addresses can range from 1 through 30. The LMF will accept any

address in that range, but the numbers entered in the LMF Options

window GPIB address boxes (Table 3-23 and Table 3-24) must match

the addresses set in the test equipment. Motorola recommends using 1

for a CDMA signal generator, 13 for a power meter, and 18 for a

communications system analyzer. To verify and, if necessary, change the

GPIB addresses of the test equipment, refer to the Setting GPIB

Addresses section of Appendix F.

Selecting Test Equipment

Serial Connection and Network Connection tabs are provided in the

LMF Options window to specify the test equipment connection method.

The Serial Connection tab is used when the test equipment items are

connected directly to the LMF computer through a GPIB box (normal

setup). The Network Connection tab is used when the test equipment is

to be connected remotely via a network connection.

Prerequisites

Be sure the following have been completed before selecting test

equipment:

STest equipment is turned on.

SGPIB addresses set in the test equipment have been verified as correct

using the applicable procedures in Appendix NO TAG.

SLMF computer serial port and test equipment are connected to the

GPIB box.

Selecting Test Equipment

Test equipment may be selected either manually with operator input or

automatically using the LMF autodetect feature.

Test Set Calibration 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-74

Manually Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab

Test equipment can be manually specified before or after the test

equipment is connected. The LMF does not attempt to verify the test

equipment is actually detected when manual selection is specified.

Follow the procedure in Table 3-23 to manually select test equipment.

Table 3-23: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in the Serial Connection Tab

Step Action

1In the LMF window menu bar, click Tools and select Options... from the pull–down menu.

– The LMF Options window appears.

2If it is not in the forefront, click on the Serial Connection tab.

3Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port: pick list (normally COM1).

4If it is not selected (black dot showing), click on the Manual Specification button.

5Click on the check box(es) corresponding to the test equipment item(s) to be used.

6Type the GPIB address in the corresponding GPIB address box (refer to the Setting GPIB Addresses

section of Appendix F for directions on verifying and/or changing test equipment GPIB addresses).

Motorola–recommended addresses are:

1 = signal generator

13 = power meter

18 = communications system analyzer

NOTE

When test equipment items are manually selected by the operator, the LMF defaults to using a power

meter for RF power measurements. The LMF will use a communications system analyzer for RF

power measurements only if a power meter is not selected (power meter checkbox not checked).

7Click on Apply.

– The button will darken until the selection has been recorded.

NOTE

With manual selection, the LMF does not attempt to detect the test equipment to verify it is connected

and communicating with the LMF.

8Click on Dismiss to close the LMF Options window.

Test Set Calibration68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-75

Automatically Selecting Test Equipment in the Serial Connection Tab

When using the auto-detection feature to select test equipment, the LMF

determines which test equipment items are actually communicating with

LMF. Follow the procedure in Table 3-24 to use the auto-detection

feature.

Table 3-24: Selecting Test Equipment Using Auto-Detect

Step Action

1In the LMF window menu bar, click Tools and select Options... from the pull–down menu.

– The LMF Options window appears.

2If it is not in the forefront, click on the Serial Connection tab.

3Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port: pick list (normally COM1).

4If it is not selected (no black dot showing), click on the Auto–Detection button.

5If they are not already displayed in the box labeled GPIB address to search, click in the box and type

in the GPIB addresses for the test equipment to be used, separating each address with commas and no

spaces. (Refer to the Setting GPIB Addresses section of Appendix F for instructions on verifying

and/or changing test equipment GPIB addresses.)

NOTE

During the GPIB address search for a test equipment item to perform RF power measurements (that is,

for TX calibration), the LMF will select the first item it finds with the capability to perform the

measurement. If, for example, the address sequence 13,18,1 is included in the GPIB addresses to

search box, the power meter (GPIB address 13) will be used for RF power measurements. If the

address sequence 18,13,1 is included, the LMF will use the communications system analyzer (GPIB

address 18) for power measurements.

6 Click Apply.

– The button will darken until the selection has been recorded.

– A check mark will appear in the applicable Manual Configuration section check boxes for

detected test equipment items.

7 Click Dismiss to close the LMF Options window.

Test Set Calibration 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-76

Calibrating Test Equipment

The LMF Calibrate Test Equipment function zeros the power

measurement level of the test equipment item that is to be used for TX

calibration and audit. If both a power meter and an analyzer are

connected (for example, an HP 437 and an HP8921A/600), only the

power meter is zeroed.

NOTE The Agilent E4406A transmitter tester does not support power

measurement level zeroing. Refer to the Equipment Calibration

section of Appendix F for E4406A calibration.

Prerequisites

SLMF computer serial port and test equipment are connected to the

GPIB box.

STest equipment is turned on and has warmed up for at least 60

minutes.

STest equipment has been selected in the LMF (Table 3-23 or

Table 3-24)

Follow the procedure in Table 3-25 to calibrate the test equipment.

Table 3-25: Test Equipment Calibration

nStep Action

1From the Util menu, select Calibrate Test Equipment

from the pull–down menu. A Directions window is

displayed.

2Follow the directions provided.

3Click on Continue to close the Directions window and

start the calibration process. A status report window is

displayed.

4Click on OK to close the status report window.

Test Set Calibration68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-77

Calibrating Cables Overview

The LMF Cable Calibration function is used to measure the path loss

(in dB) for the TX and RX cables, adapters, directional couplers, and

attenuators that make up the cable configurations used for testing. A

communications system analyzer is used to measure the loss of both the

TX test cable and the RX test cable configurations. LMF cable

calibration consists of the following processes:

1. Measure the loss of a short cable. This is done to compensate for any

measurement error of the communications system analyzer. The

short cable, which is used only for the calibration process, is

connected in series with both the TX and RX test cable

configurations when they are measured. The measured loss of the

short cable is deducted from the measured loss of the TX and RX

test cable configurations to determine the actual loss of the

configurations. This deduction is done so any error in the analyzer

measurement will be adjusted out of both the TX and RX

measurements.

2. Measure the loss of the short cable plus the RX test cable

configuration. The RX test cable configuration normally consists

only of a coax cable with type–N connectors that is long enough to

reach from the BTS RX connector to the test equipment. When the

BTS antenna connectors carry duplexed TX and RX signals, a

directional coupler and, if required by BTS type, an additional

attenuator are also required for the RX test cable configuration.

These additional items must be included in the path loss

measurement.

3. Measure the loss of the short cable plus the TX test cable

configuration. The TX test cable configuration normally consists of

two coax cables with type–N connectors, a directional coupler, a

termination load with sufficient rating to dissipate the BTS output

power, and an additional attenuator, if required by the BTS type. The

total path loss of the TX test configuration must be as required for

the BTS (normally 30 or 50 dB). The Motorola Cybertest analyzer is

different from other communications system analyzers because the

required attenuation/load is built into the test set. Because of this,

the Cybertest TX test configuration consists only of the required

length coax cable.

Test Set Calibration 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-78

Calibrating Test Cabling using Communications System Analyzer

NOTE LMF cable calibration cannot be accomplished with an

HP8921A analyzer for 1.9 GHz. A different analyzer type or the

signal generator and spectrum analyzer method (Table 3-27 and

Table 3-28) must be used. Cable calibration values must be

manually entered into the LMF cable loss file if the signal

generator and spectrum analyzer method is used. To use the

HP8921A for manual test cable configuration calibration for 800

MHz BTSs, refer to the Manual Cable Calibration section of

Appendix F.

Prerequisites

STest equipment is turned on and has warmed up for at least 60

minutes.

STest equipment has been selected in the LMF (Table 3-23 or

Table 3-24).

STest equipment has been calibrated and correctly connected for the

type of test cable configuration to be calibrated.

Procedure

Refer to Figure 3-11, Figure 3-12, or Figure 3-13 and follow the

procedure in Table 3-26 to calibrate the test cable configurations.

Table 3-26: Test Cabling Calibration using Comm. System Analyzer

nStep Action

1 Click Util in the BTS menu bar, and select Cable

Calibration... in the pull–down menu. A Cable

Calibration window is displayed.

2Enter one or more channel numbers in the Channels box.

NOTE

Multiple channel numbers must be separated by a comma

with no spaces (for example, 200,800). When two or

more channel numbers are entered, the cables will be

calibrated for each channel. Interpolation will be

accomplished for other channels, as required, for TX

calibration.

3 Select TX and RX CABLE CAL, TX CABLE CAL or

RX CABLE CAL in the Cable Calibration picklist.

4 Click OK, and follow the directions displayed for each

step. A status report window will be displayed with the

results of the cable calibration.

Test Set Calibration68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-79

Calibrate Test Cabling Using Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer

Refer to Figure 3-23 and follow the procedure in Table 3-27 to calibrate

the TX test cable configuration for all BTSs or the RX ATP test cable

configuration for BTSs with duplexed TX/RX using the signal generator

and spectrum analyzer. Refer to Figure 3-24 and follow the procedure in

Table 3-28 to calibrate the test cable configuration for non–duplexed RX

using the signal generator and spectrum analyzer.

TX and Duplexed RX Cable Calibration

Table 3-27: Calibrate TX/Duplexed RX Test Cabling using Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer

Step Action

1Connect a short test cable between the spectrum analyzer and the signal generator as shown in

Figure 3-23, detail “A” (top portion of figure).

2Set signal generator to 0 dBm at the customer frequency of the 869.7–893.31 MHz band for North

American cellular and 1930–1990 MHz band for North American PCS.

3Use spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output and record the value for the detail “A”

setup.

4Change the test setup to the one shown in detail “B” (lower portion of Figure 3-23), to measure cable

output at customer frequency (869.7–893.31 MHz band for North American cellular and 1930–1990

MHz for North American PCS) and record the value measured using the detail “B” test setup.

5Calibration factor = (value measured with detail “A” setup) – (value measured with detail “B” setup)

Example: Cal factor = –1 dBm – (–53.5 dBm) = 52.5 dB

NOTE

The short cable is used for calibration only. It is not part of the final test setup. After calibration is

completed, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the test cable configuration as–is to ensure test

procedures use the correct calibration factor.

Figure 3-23: Cal Setup for TX/Duplexed RX Test Cabling Using Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer

50 OHM

TERMINATION

30 DB

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

Spectrum

Analyzer

Signal

Generator

Spectrum

Analyzer

40W NON–RADIATING

RF LOAD

SHORT TEST CABLE

Signal

Generator

THIS WILL CONNECT TO THE POWER METER OR

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ANALYZER DURING TX

CALIBRATION AND TO THE COMMUNICATIONS

SYSTEM ANALYZER DURING TX AND RX ATP TESTS.

SHORT

TEST

CABLE

SECOND TX TEST CABLE

FOR TX CAL AND ATP

20DB 20 W IN–LINE

ATTENUATOR FOR

1.9 GHZ

THIS WILL CONNECT TO THE BTS TX

ANTENNA CONNECTOR DURING TX

CALIBRATION AND TO THE TX/RX ANTENNA

CONNECTORS DURING ATP TESTS.

TX TEST

CABLE

RX TEST CABLE

FOR RX ATP TEST

Test Set Calibration 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-80

Non-Duplexed RX Cable Calibration

Table 3-28: Calibrating Non–Duplexed RX Test Cabling Using Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer

Step Action

1NOTE

When preparing to calibrate a BTS with duplexed TX and RX the RX cable calibration must be done

using calibration setup in Figure 3-23 and the procedure in Table 3-27.

Connect a short test cable between the spectrum analyzer and the signal generator as shown in

Figure 3-24, detail “A” (top portion of figure).

2Set signal generator to –10 dBm at the customer’s RX frequency of 824.7–848.31 MHz for North

American cellular or 1850–1910 MHz band for North American PCS.

3Use the spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output and record the value for the detail “A”

setup.

4Change the test setup to the one shown in detail “B” (lower portion of Figure 3-24) to measure the

output at the customer’s RX frequency (824.7–848.31 MHz for North American cellular or 1850–1910

MHz band for North American PCS). Record the value measured with the detail “B” test setup.

5Calibration factor = (value measured with detail “A” setup) – (value measured with detail “B” setup)

Example: Cal factor = –12 dBm – (–14 dBm) = 2 dB

NOTE

The short test cable is used for test equipment setup calibration only. It is not part of the final test

setup. After calibration is completed, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the test cable configuration

as–is to ensure test procedures use the correct calibration factor.

Figure 3-24: Cal Setup for Non–Duplexed RX Test Cabling Using Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer

Spectrum

Analyzer

Signal

Generator

Spectrum

Analyzer

SHORT

TEST

CABLE

CONNECTION TO THE COMMUNICATIONS

SYSTEM ANALYZER RF OUTPUT

CONNECTOR DURING RX MEASUREMENTS

Signal

Generator

BULLET

CONNECTOR

RX TEST

CABLE

SHORT TEST

CABLE

CONNECTION TO THE BTS RX ANTENNA

CONNECTOR DURING RX ATP

IMPORTANT: IF BTS TX/RX SIGNALS ARE

DUPLEXED, THE RX TEST CABLE CONNECTS

TO THE DUPLEXED ANTENNA CONNECTOR

AND MUST USE/BE CALIBRATED WITH THE 30

DB DIRECTIONAL COUPLER AND 20 DB

IN–LINE ATTENUATOR. SEE FIGURE 3-23.

Test Set Calibration68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-81

Setting Cable Loss Values

Cable loss values for TX and RX test cable configurations are normally

set by accomplishing automatic cable calibration using the LMF and the

applicable test equipment. The LMF stores the measured loss values in

the cable loss files. The cable loss values can also be set or changed

manually.

CAUTION If cable calibration was performed without using the LMF, cable

loss values must be manually entered in the LMF database.

Failure to do this will result in inaccurate BTS calibration and

reduced site performance.

Prerequisites

SLMF is logged into the BTS

Table 3-29: Setting Cable Loss Values

Step Action

1 Click Util in the BTS menu bar, and select Edit > Cable Loss in the pull–down menus.

–A tabbed data entry pop–up window will appear.

2Click on the TX Cable Loss tab or the RX Cable Loss tab, as required.

3To add a new channel number, perform the following:

3a – Click on the Add Row button.

3b – Click in the Channel # or Loss (dBm) column, as required.

3c – Enter the desired value.

4To edit existing values, click in the data box to be changed and change the value.

5To delete a row, click on the row and then click on the Delete Row button.

6For each tab with changes, click on the Save button to save displayed values.

7Click on the Dismiss button to close the window.

NOTE

SValues entered or changed after the Save button was used will be lost when the window is

dismissed.

SIf cable loss values exist for two different channels the LMF will interpolate for all other channels.

SEntered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. It is not necessary to log out and

log back into the LMF for changes to take effect.

Test Set Calibration 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-82

Setting TX Coupler Loss Value

If an in–service TX coupler is installed, the coupler loss must be

manually entered so it will be included in the LMF TX calibration and

audit calculations.

Prerequisites

SLMF is logged into the BTS

SPath loss, in dB, of the TX coupler must be known

Table 3-30: Setting TX Coupler Loss Values

Step Action

1 Click Util in the BTS menu bar, and select Edit > Coupler Loss... in the pull–down menus.

–A tabbed data entry pop–up window will appear.

2Click on the TX Coupler Loss tab or the RX Coupler Loss tab, as required

3Click in the Loss (dBm) column for each carrier that has a coupler and enter the appropriate value.

4To edit existing values, click in the data box to be changed and change the value.

5For each tab with changes, click on the Save button to save displayed values.

6Click on the Dismiss button to close the window.

NOTE

SValues entered or changed after the Save button is used will be lost when the window is dismissed.

SThe In–Service Calibration check box in the Tools > Options > BTS Options tab must be

checked before entered TX coupler loss values will be used by the TX calibration and audit

functions.

SNew or changed values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. Logging out and logging

in again are not required to cause saved changes to take effect.

Bay Level Offset Calibration68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-83

Bay Level Offset Calibration

Purpose of Bay Level Offset Calibration

Bay Level Offset (BLO) calibration is the central activity of the

optimization process. BLO calibration compensates for normal

equipment variations within the BTS RF paths and assures the correct

transmit power is available at the BTS antenna connectors to meet site

performance requirements.

What is BLO Calibration?

Description

BLO calibration is the complete title of what is normally referred to as

“calibration.” Calibration identifies the accumulated gain in every

transmit path at the BTS site. The transmit path BLO values determined

during calibration are stored in the LMF calibration data file, and are

subsequently downloaded to each BBX. When transmit path calibration

is performed, receive path BLO values will automatically be set to the

default value in the LMF calibration file and downloaded.

BTS RF Path Descriptions

Transmit (TX) path – A TX path starts at an SCCP shelf BBX

backplane slot, travels through the CIO card, is routed to the Power

Amplifier (PA) trunking module for sector phase shifting, through the

PAs, back through the PA trunking module for sector phase selection,

through the TX bandpass filter (starter frames) or 2:1 TX combiner

(companion frames), through the Transmit & Receive Filter (TRF) or

Duplexer TX/RF Filter (DRF), and ends at the TRF or DRF antenna

connector.

Receive (RX) main path – A main RX path starts at ANTENNAS

connectors 1A, 2A, or 3A and travels through the associated TRF or

DRF, the MPC in SCCP cage slot MPC–1, the CIO card, and terminates

at a backplane BBX slot in the SCCP shelf.

Diversity RX path – Diversity RX paths differ for SC4812T Lite starter

(stand–alone) and companion frames. The following describe each type

of path:

SStarter frame diversity RX path – A starter frame diversity RX path

is the same as a main RX path except that it starts at ANTENNAS

connectors 1B, 2B, or 3B, travels through the associated TRF or DRF,

and the MPC card in SCCP cage slot MPC–2 (refer to Table 1-6).

SCompanion frame diversity RX path – The companion frame main

RX signal is used for the collocated companion frame diversity RX

signal. A companion frame’s diversity RX path starts at ANTENNAS

connectors 1A, 2A, or 3A in the collocated companion frame. It

travels through the associated TRF or DRF, the MPC in SCCP cage

slot MPC–1, and the CIO card where it is then routed out of the frame

through the RX expansion out connectors (RX EXPANSION 1A, 2A,

Bay Level Offset Calibration 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-84

or 3A). The signal travels through the inter–frame diversity RX

cables, into the RX expansion in ports (RX EXPANSION 1B, 2B, or

3B in NO TAG or NO TAG) of the companion frame, through the

Expansion MPC (EMPC) in SCCP cage slot MPC–2, the CIO, and

terminates at a backplane BBX slot in the SCCP shelf.

SRFDS sampling paths – Directional couplers for RFDS signal

sampling are integral to the SC4812T Lite transmit and receive paths

in the DRDCs and TRDCs. Cables connect from these directional

couplers to the RFDS input connectors.

Component Verification During Calibration

TX Path Calibration

TX path calibration supports verification of correct BTS installation, RF

cabling installation and performance, functionality of all equipment

installed in the transmit RF chain, and the proper functioning of each

transmit RF path. External test equipment is used to calibrate and audit

the TX paths of the BTS.

RX Path Calibration

RX path calibration is not required or supported on CDMA BTS

systems. Default RX calibration values are written to the RX calibration

data files during the TX calibration process. RX functionality is verified

during Frame Erasure Rate (FER) testing.

When to Calibrate BLOs

Calibration to determine BLO:

1. Is required after initial BTS installation.

2. Must be done once each year for an operational BTS site.

3. Is recommended by Motorola for all associated RF paths after

replacing any of the following components:

– BBX card

– SCCP shelf

– CIO card

– CIO–to–PA trunking module RF cable

– PA trunking module

– Power Amplifier

– Trunking module–to–TX filter/filter combiner RF cable

– TX filter or TX filter combiner

– TX filter/filter combiner–to–DRDC/TRDC cable

– DRDC or TRDC

BLO Calibration Data File

During the calibration process, the LMF creates a calibration (CAL) data

file where BLO values are stored. After calibration has been completed,

these offset values must be downloaded to the BBXs using the LMF

BLO download function. A detailed description of the file organization

and content is provided in the following paragraphs

Bay Level Offset Calibration68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-85

NOTE Due to the size of the file, Motorola recommends printing out a

copy of a bts–#.cal file and referring to it for the following

descriptions.

CAL File Organization

The CAL file is subdivided into three sections called “slot Blocks”.

These are:

1. Slot[1] Block which contains the calibration data for the six primary

BBX slots.

2. Slot[20] Block which contains the calibration data for the redundant

BBX (see Table 3-32).

3. Slot[385] Block which contains the calibration data for the RFDS.

BBX Slot Block Parts

BBX slot Blocks are further subdivided into the parts described in the

following:

Slot Block Header – Each BBX slot Block has a header section (slot

header) which contains:

SA creation Date and Time – broken down into separate parameters of

createMonth, createDay, createYear, createHour, and createMin.

SThe number of calibration entries in the file – the numBayLevelPts

parameter. The parameter is fixed at 720 entries for SC4812–series

frames. These 720 entries are combined to define the 360 calibration

points of the CAL file.

SThe slot Block format parameter.

Slot Block Bay Level Calibration Data – Each BBX slot Block has a

Bay Level Calibration data section (BayLevelCal) which is organized as

a large flat array. The array is organized by branch, SCCP cage BBX

slot, and calibration entries. There are several ways to look at the array

contents. Two different views are provided in the following to illustrate

the significant features of BayLevelCal section content and organization:

SThe first view of the array is shown in Table 3-31. This view shows

the three branches of the array, transmit, main receive, and diversity

receive offsets, and the calibration entry ranges which apply to each.

Table 3-31: BLO bts–#.cal File Array Branch Assignments

Range Branch Assignment

C[1]–C[120] Transmit

C[121]–C[240] No SC4812T Lite BLO cal point

entries (default only)

C[241]–C[360] Receive

C[361]–C[480] No SC4812T Lite BLO cal point

entries (default only)

C[481]–C[600] Diversity Receive

C[601]–C[720] No SC4812T Lite BLO cal point

entries (default only)

Bay Level Offset Calibration 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-86

SThe second view of the array is shown in Table 3-32. This view shows

the assignment of calibration entries in each branch to each BBX slot,

carrier, and sectorization. Three sectors are allowed for an SC4812T

Lite frame.

Table 3-32: SC4812T Lite bts–#.cal File Array (By BBX/Sector)

BBX Sectorization TX Branch RX Branch RX Diversity

Branch

Slot[1] (Primary BBXs 1 through 6)

1 (Omni)

3S t

C[1]–C[20] C[241]–C[260] C[481]–C[500]

23–Sector,

1st Carrier

C[21]–C[40] C[261]–C[280] C[501]–C[520]

1st Carrier

C[41]–C[60] C[281]–C[300] C[521]–C[540]

3S t

C[61]–C[80] C[301]–C[320] C[541]–C[560]

53–Sector,

2nd Carrier

C[81]–C[100] C[321]–C[340] C[561]–C[580]

2nd Carrier

C[101]–C[120] C[341]–C[360] C[581]–C[600]

C[121]–C[140] C[361]–C[380] C[601]–C[620]

Not Used in SC4812T Lite

C[141]–C[160] C[381]–C[400] C[621]–C[640]

t U

d i

SC4812T Lit

(

CAL file entries are C[161]–C[180] C[401]–C[420] C[641]–C[660]

(CAL file entries are

Channel 0 with default

t l l )

C[181]–C[200] C[421]–C[440] C[661]–C[680]

power set level.) C[201]–C[220] C[441]–C[460] C[681]–C[700]

C[221]–C[240] C[461]–C[480] C[701]–C[720]

Slot[20] (Redundant BBX–R1)

1 (Omni)

3S t

C[1]–C[20] C[241]–C[260] C[481]–C[500]

23–Sector,

1st Carrier

C[21]–C[40] C[261]–C[280] C[501]–C[520]

1st Carrier

C[41]–C[60] C[281]–C[300] C[521]–C[540]

3S t

C[61]–C[80] C[301]–C[320] C[541]–C[560]

53–Sector,

2nd Carrier

C[81]–C[100] C[321]–C[340] C[561]–C[580]

2nd Carrier

C[101]–C[120] C[341]–C[360] C[581]–C[600]

C[121]–C[140] C[361]–C[380] C[601]–C[620]

Not Used in SC4812T Lite

C[141]–C[160] C[381]–C[400] C[621]–C[640]

t U

d i

SC4812T Lit

(

CAL file entries are C[161]–C[180] C[401]–C[420] C[641]–C[660]

(CAL file entries are

Channel 0 with default

t l l )

C[181]–C[200] C[421]–C[440] C[661]–C[680]

power set level.) C[201]–C[220] C[441]–C[460] C[681]–C[700]

C[221]–C[240] C[461]–C[480] C[701]–C[720]

SWhen referring to the CAL file print–out and Table 3-32, it can be

seen that there is one BBX slot per sector with 20 “calibration entries”

per BBX (sector) for each branch. Two calibration entries define a

single “calibration point;” therefore there are ten calibration points in

each branch for each BBX.

– The first entry for a calibration point (all odd entries) identifies the

CDMA channel (frequency) where the BLO is measured. The

second calibration entry (all even entries) is the power set level

(PwrLvlAdj) for that frequency. The valid range for PwrLvlAdj is

Bay Level Offset Calibration68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-87

from 2500 to 27500 (2500 corresponds to –125 dBm and 27500

corresponds to +125 dBm).

– The ten calibration points for each slot–branch combination must be

stored in order of increasing frequency. If less than ten points

(frequencies) are calibrated, the BLO data for the highest frequency

calibrated is written into the remainder of the ten points for that

slot–branch.

Example:

C[1]=384 (odd cal entry)

C[2]=19102 (even cal entry)

C[3]=777 (odd cal entry)

C[4]=19086 (even cal entry)

C[19]=777 (odd cal entry)

C[20]=19086 (even cal entry)

= 1 “calibration point”

In the example above, BLO was measured at only two frequencies

(channels 384 and 777) for SCCP slot BBX–1 transmit (Table 3-32).

The BLO data for the highest frequency measured (channel 777) will

be written to the remaining eight transmit calibration points (defined

by entries C[5] through C[20]) for BBX–1.

Slot Block Temperature Compensation – Each BBX slot Block also

has a temperature compensation data section (TempLevelCal) where

power level compensation factors for temperature variations are stored.

CAL File and BLO Data Download

When BLO data is downloaded to the BBXs after calibration, the data is

downloaded to the devices in the order it is stored in the CAL file. TX

calibration data (entries C[1] – C[60]) are sent first. Data for the ten

BBX slot 1 calibration points (entries C[1] – C[20]) are sent initially,

followed by data for the ten BBX slot 2 calibration points (entries C[21]

– C[40]), and so on. The RX calibration data is sent next in BBX slot

sequence, followed by RX Diversity calibration data.

Bay Level Offset Calibration 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-88

Test Equipment Setup for RF Path Calibration

Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-33 and refer as needed to

Figure 3-14 or Figure 3-15 to set up test equipment.

Table 3-33: Set Up Test Equipment for RF Path Calibration

Step Action

1If it has not already been done, refer to the procedure in Table 3-5 (on page 3-17) to interface the LMF

computer terminal to the frame LAN A connector.

2If it has not already been done, refer to Table 3-6 (on page 3-26) to start a GUI LMF session.

3If required, calibrate the test equipment per the procedure in Table 3-25 (on page 3-76).

! CAUTION

To prevent damage to the test equipment, all transmit (TX) test connections must be via the 30 dB

directional coupler for 800 MHz or via a 30 dB coupler with a 20 dB in–line attenuator for 1900 MHz.

4For TX path calibration, connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-14, Figure 3-15, or

Figure 3-16, depending on the communications analyzer being used.

Transmit (TX) Path Calibration Description

The assigned channel frequency and desired power level at the frame TX

ports for transmit calibration are derived from the BTS CDF file. Each

BBX at the site is assigned to a sector and carrier. These are specified

respectively in the sector and carrier fields of the ParentCARRIER

parameter in each BBXs CDF file block. The channel frequency and

desired power for the assigned sector are specified respectively in the

ChannelList and SIFPilotPwr parameters of the CDF block for the

CARRIER to which the BBX is assigned.

NOTE Be sure the bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.cdf files

loaded on the LMF computer are current. The LMF will obtain

carrier and channel information from these files and insert it into

the appropriate CDMA Test Parameter screen. Failure to have

the most current files from the CBSC can result in incorrect

channel information being used to calibrate the BTS and

unfavorable affects on BTS performance. Carrier and channel

numbers should only be entered manually for special test cases

or as a last resort.

The calibration process attempts to adjust the measured power to within

+0.5 dB of the desired power. The calibration will pass if the error is less

than +1.5 dB.

The TX BLO for the SC 4812T Lite is approximately 42.0 dB ±5.0 dB.

BLO is the gain in dB between the known power output of the BBX and

the measured power at the TX port. BLO is derived by deducting the

known BBX power output from the power measured at the TX port or

(Measured Power) – (BBX TX Power Output).

Example:

Measured Power (at TX port) = 36.0 dBm

Known BBX TX Power Output = –6.0 dBm

BLO = (36.0) – (–6.0) = 42.0 dB gain

Bay Level Offset Calibration68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-89

TX Calibration and the LMF

The LMF Tests > TX > TX Calibration... and Tests > All Cal/Audit...

selections perform TX BLO calibration testing for installed BBX(s). The

All Cal/Audit... selection initiates a series of actions to perform TX

calibration, and if calibration is successful, download BLO and perform

TX audit. The TX Calibration... selection performs only TX

calibration. When TX Calibration... is used, BLO download and TX

audit must be performed as separate activities. The CDMA Test

Parameters window which opens when TX Calibration... or All

Cal/Audit... is selected contains several user–selectable features which

are described in the following subsections.

Rate Set Drop–down Pick List

The Rate Set Drop–down Box is enabled if at least one MCC card is

selected for the test. The available options for TX tests are 1 = 9600, and

3 = 9600 1X. Option 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the

test. The available transfer rate options for RX tests are 1 = 9600 and

2 = 14400. Option 2 is only available if no 1X cards are selected.

Verify BLO Checkbox

In both the TX Calibration and All Cal/Audit dialog boxes, a Verify

BLO checkbox is provided and checked by default. After the actual TX

calibration is completed during either the TX Calibration or All

Cal/Audit process, the BLO derived from the calibration is compared to

a standard, acceptable BLO tolerance for the BTS. In some installations,

additional items may be installed in the transmit path. The additional

change in gain from these items could cause BLO verification failure

and, therefore, failure of the entire calibration. In these cases, either the

Verify BLO checkbox should be unchecked or the additional path losses

should be added into each applicable sector using the

Single–Sided BLO Checkbox

An acceptable range of BLO values for each type of BTS is established

to allow for tolerance variations in all the components of the RF chain.

This acceptable range, 42+5 dB for example, is very wide to

accommodate the redundant BBX in the BTS. This is a much wider

tolerance than necessary for the primary BBXs. Primary BBXs normally

will have BLOs in the lower half of the range. Using the example range,

this would be from 37 to 42 dB. Checking the Single–Sided BLO

checkbox should only be done when calibrating primary BBXs because

it will reduce the acceptable BLO value variations to the lower half of

the range. Because this is a much more stringent tolerance, calibrations

run with Single–Sided BLO are more likely to fail and should only be

attempted by an experienced CFE. Never select Single–Sided BLO

when calibrating a redundant BBX.

Bay Level Offset Calibration 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-90

Test Pattern Drop–down Pick List

The Tests > TX > TX Calibration... menu window has a Test Pattern

pull–down menu. This menu has the following choices:

SStandard – performs calibration or audit using pilot, paging, synch,

and six traffic channels with IS–97–specified gain. This pattern setting

should be used for all non–in–service calibrations and audits. Using

this pattern setting requires the selection of both a BBX and at least

one MCC.

SPilot (default) – performs calibration using only the pilot channel.

This pattern setting should be used for in–service calibrations, and

requires selection of only a BBX.

SCDFPilot – This pattern setting is for advanced users. It performs

calibration or audit using the CDF value for pilot gain and IS–97 gain

values for all the other channels included in the Standard pattern

setting (paging, synch, and six traffic). Using this pattern setting

requires the selection of both a BBX and at least one MCC.

SCDF – This pattern setting is for advanced users who need to use

CDF gain settings for all channels included in the Standard pattern

setting (pilot, paging, synch, and six traffic). Using this pattern setting

requires the selection of both a BBX and at least one MCC.

Test Pattern Channels and Gain Settings – The CDMA channels and

their respective digital gain settings used for each test pattern are listed

in Table 3-34.

Table 3-34: Test Patterns with Channels and Gain Settings Used

Test Pattern Channel(s) Gain Setting

Pilot Pilot channel only 541

Standard Pilot 117

Synch channel (SCH) 57

Paging (PCH) 114

Traffic (TCH) 80 for each of 6 Walsh codes

used (6*80)

CDF Pilot Pilot Uses CDF–specified pilot

gain

SCH 57

PCH 114

TCH 6*80

CDF Pilot All channels use

CDF ifi d i

SCH CDF–specified gains

PCH

TCH (6)

Bay Level Offset Calibration68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-91

TX Calibration

WARNING Before installing any test equipment directly to any BTS TX

OUT connector, first verify no CDMA channels are keyed.

Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury and/or

equipment damage.

CAUTION Always wear an approved anti–static wrist strap while handling

any circuit card or module. If this is not done, there is a high

probability that the card or module could be damaged by ESD.

NOTE At new site installations, to facilitate the complete test of each

SCCP shelf (if the shelf is not already fully populated with BBX

boards), move BBX boards from shelves currently not under test

and install them into the empty BBX slots of the shelf currently

being tested to insure that all BBX TX paths are tested.

– This procedure can be bypassed on operational sites that are

due for periodic optimization.

– Prior to testing, view the CDF (or NECF) file to verify the

correct BBX slots are equipped. Edit the file as required to

include BBX slots not currently equipped (per Systems

Engineering documentation).

Bay Level Offset Calibration 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-92

All Cal/Audit and TX Calibration Procedure

The LMF All Cal/Audit and TX calibration procedures are essentially

identical, except for the step that selects the type of procedure desired

(Refer to Step 4 in Table 3-35).

Prerequisites

Before running this procedure, be sure that the following have been

done:

SThe card in slot CSM 1, GLIs, MCCs, and BBXs have correct code

and data loads.

SPrimary CSM and MGLI are INS_ACT (bright green).

SAll BBXs are OOS_RAM (yellow).

SIf running calibration or audit using a test pattern other than Pilot,

MCCs are INS_ACT (bright green).

STest equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX

calibration.

SLMF is logged into the BTS in the GUI environment.

NOTE Verify all BBX boards removed and repositioned have been

returned to their assigned shelves/slots. Any BBX boards moved

since they were downloaded will have to be downloaded again.

Follow the procedure in Table 3-35 to perform BLO calibration on the

TX paths, download BLO values to the BBXs, and perform TX path

audit in one operation.

Table 3-35: All Cal/Audit and TX Calibration Procedure

Step Action

1If it has not already been done, configure test equipment for TX calibration by following the

procedure in Table 3-33.

2Click on the BBX(s) to be calibrated.

3If the Test Pattern to be used is Standard, CDFPilot, or CDF, select at least one MCC (refer to “Test

Pattern Drop–down Pick List” under “TX Calibration and the LMF” in this section).

4For All Cal Audit...

– Click Tests in the BTS menu bar, and select TX > All Cal/Audit... from the pull–down menus.

A CDMA Test Parameters window will appear.

For TX Calibration

– Click Tests in the BTS menu bar, and select TX > TX Calibration from the pull–down menus.

A CDMA Test Parameters window will appear.

5Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayed in the

Channels/Carrier pick list.

NOTE

To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while clicking on pick list items to select

multiple carrier(s)–sector(s).

. . . continued on next page

Bay Level Offset Calibration68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-93

Table 3-35: All Cal/Audit and TX Calibration Procedure

Step Action

6Verify that the correct channel number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier # Channels

box. If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.cdf files from the CBSC.

NOTE

If necessary, the correct channel number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channels box.

7If at least one MCC was selected in Step 3, select the appropriate transfer rate (1 = 9600, 3 = 9600 1X)

from the drop–down list in the Rate Set box.

NOTE

The rate selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test.

8 If Verify BLO is to be used during the calibration, leave the checkbox checked (default).

9If Single–Sided BLO is to be used during the calibration, click on the checkbox.

* IMPORTANT

Single–Sided BLO should only be used for primary BBXs. Do not check the box when calibrating the

redundant BBX.

10 In the Test Pattern box, select the test pattern to use for the calibration from the drop–down list (refer

to “Test Pattern Drop–down Pick List” under “TX Calibration and the LMF” in this section).

11 Click OK to display the status report window followed by a Directions pop-up window.

12 Follow cable connection directions as they are displayed.

– When the calibration process is completed, results will be displayed in the status report window.

13 Click OK to close the status report window.

Exception Handling

In the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAIL

message in the status report window and provides information in the

Description field.

Re–check the test setup and connection and re–run the calibration. If the

calibration fails again, note specifics about the failure, and refer to

Chapter 6, Troubleshooting.

Bay Level Offset Calibration 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-94

Download BLO Procedure

After a successful TX path calibration, download the BLO calibration

file data to the BBXs. BLO data is extracted from the CAL file for the

BTS and downloaded to the selected BBX devices.

NOTE If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, this procedure

does not need to be performed, as BLO is downloaded as part of

the All Cal/Audit.

Prerequisites

Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding.

SBBXs to receive the download are OOS_RAM (yellow).

STX calibration was successfully completed

Follow the steps in Table 3-36 to download the BLO data to the BBXs.

Table 3-36: Download BLO

nStep Action

1Select the BBX(s) to be downloaded.

2 Click Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Download

> BLO from the pull–down menus. A status report

window displays the result of the download.

NOTE

Selected device(s) do not change color when BLO is

downloaded.

3 Click OK to close the status report window.

Bay Level Offset Calibration68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-95

Calibration Audit Introduction

The BLO calibration audit procedure confirms the successful generation

and storage of the BLO calibration values. The calibration audit

procedure measures the path gain or loss of every BBX transmit path at

the site. In this test, actual system tolerances are used to determine the

success or failure of a test. The same external test equipment set–up

required for TX calibration is used for TX audit.

NOTE RF path verification, BLO calibration, and BLO data download

to BBXs must have been successfully completed prior to

performing the calibration audit.

TX Path Audit

Perform the calibration audit of the TX paths of all equipped BBX slots,

per the steps in Table 3-37.

WARNING Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUT

connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX channels

keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury

and/or equipment damage.

NOTE If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, this procedure

does not need to be performed, as BLO is downloaded as part of

the All Cal/Audit.

TX Audit Test

The Tests menu item, TX Audit, performs the TX BLO Audit test for

BBXs. All measurements are made through the appropriate TX output

connector using the TX calibration setup.

Prerequisites

Before running this test, the following should be done:

SThe card in slot CSM 1, GLIs, BBXs have correct code load.

SPrimary CSM and MGLI are INS_ACT (bright green).

SAll BBXs are OOS_RAM (yellow).

STest equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX

BLO calibration.

SLMF is logged into the BTS.

Bay Level Offset Calibration 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-96

TX Path Audit procedure

After a TX calibration has been performed, or if verification of BLO data

in the CAL file is required, follow the procedure in Table 3-37 to

perform a BTS TX path audit.

Table 3-37: BTS TX Path Audit

nStep Action

1If it has not already been done, configure test equipment for TX path audit by following the procedure

in Table 3-33 (TX audit uses the same configuration as TX calibration).

2Select the BBX(s) to be audited.

3If the Test Pattern to be used is Standard, CDFPilot, or CDF, select at least one MCC (refer to

“Test Pattern Drop–down Pick List” under “TX Calibraton and the LMF” in this section).

4 Click Tests in the BTS menu bar, and select TX > TX Audit... from the pull–down menus. A

CDMA Test Parameters window will appear.

5Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayed in the

Channels/Carrier pick list.

NOTE

To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while clicking on pick list items to

select multiple carrier(s)–sector(s).

6Verify that the correct channel number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier # Channels

box. If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.cdf files from the CBSC.

NOTE

If necessary, the correct channel number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channels

box.

7If at least one MCC was selected in Step 3, select the appropriate transfer rate (1 = 9600, 3 = 9600

1X) from the drop–down list in the Rate Set box.

NOTE

The rate selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test.

8From the Test Pattern pick list, select a test pattern.

– Selecting Pilot (default) performs tests using a pilot signal only.

– Selecting Standard performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels. This

requires an MCC to be selected.

– Selecting CDFPilot performs tests using the CDF value for pilot gain and IS–97 gain values

for all the other channels included in the Standard pattern setting (paging, synch, and six

traffic). Using this pattern setting requires the selection of both a BBX and at least one MCC.

– Selecting CDF performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels, however, the

gain for the channel elements is specified in the CDF file.

9 Click OK to display the status report window followed by a Directions pop-up window.

10 Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. When the calibration process is

completed, results will be displayed in the status report window.

11 Click on the Save Results or Dismiss button, as desired, to close the status report window.

Bay Level Offset Calibration68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-97

Exception Handling

In the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAIL

message in the status report window and provides information in the

Description field.

Re–check the test setup and connections and re–run the test. If the tests

fail again, note specifics about the failure, and refer to Chapter 6,

Troubleshooting.

Create CAL File

The LMF Create Cal File function gets the BLO data from BBXs and

creates/updates the CAL file for the BTS. If a CAL file does not exist a

new one is created. If a CAL file already exists it is updated. After a

BTS has been fully optimized a copy of the CAL file must exist so it can

be transferred to the CBSC. If TX calibration has been successfully

performed for all BBXs and BLO data has been downloaded, a CAL file

will exist. Note the following:

SThe Create Cal File function only applies to selected (highlighted)

BBXs.

CAUTION Editing the CAL file is not encouraged as this action can cause

interface problems between the BTS and the LMF. To manually

edit the CAL file you must first logout of the BTS. If you

manually edit the CAL file and then use the Create Cal File

function the edited information will be lost.

Prerequisites

Before running this procedure, the following should be done:

SLMF is logged into the BTS

SBBXs are OOS_RAM (yellow)

SBLO has been downloaded to the BBXs

Table 3-38: Create CAL File

Step Action

1Select the applicable BBXs.

– The CAL file will be updated for the selected BBXs only.

2Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Create Cal

File from the pull–down menu.

– A status report window will appear and display the

results of the action.

3Click the OK button to close the status report window.

RFDS Set–up and Calibration 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-98

RFDS Set–up and Calibration

RFDS Description

The optional RFDS is used to perform RF tests of the site from the

CBSC or from the LMF. The RFDS contains the following FRUs:

SAntenna Select Unit (ASU)

SFixed Wireless Terminal Interface Card (FWTIC)

SSubscriber Unit Assembly (SUA)

For complete information regarding the RFDS, refer to the CDMA

CDMA RFDS Hardware Installation; 68P64113A93, CDMA RFDS

User’s Guide; 68P64114A51, and the LMF Help function on–line

documentation.

RFDS Parameters

The bts–#.cdf file includes RFDS parameter settings that must match the

installed RFDS equipment. The paragraphs below describe the editable

parameters and their defaults. Table 3-39 explains how to edit the

parameter settings.

SRfdsEquip – valid inputs are 0 through 2.

0 = (default) RFDS is not equipped

1 = Non-Cobra/Patzer box RFDS

2 = Cobra RFDS

STsuEquip – valid inputs are 0 or 1

0 = (default) TSU not equipped

1 = TSU is equipped in the system

SMC1....4 – valid inputs are 0 or 1

0 = (default) Not equipped

1 = Multicouplers equipped in RFDS system

(SC9600 internal RFDS only)

SAsu1/2Equip – valid inputs are 0 or 1

0 = (default) Not equipped

1 = Equipped

STestOrigDN – valid inputs are ’’’ (default) or a numerical string up to

15 characters. (This is the phone number the RFDS dials when

originating a call. A dummy number needs to be set up by the switch,

and is to be used in this field.)

NOTE Any text editor may be used to open the bts–#.cdf file to verify,

view, or modify data. Because the bts–#.cdf file is generated on

a Unix system, a more sophisticated editor, such as MicroSoft

WordPad, will display file content in a more easily–read format

than many simple text editors.

RFDS Set–up and Calibration68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-99

Checking and Setting RFDS Parameters

Follow the procedure in Table 3-39 to review and/or edit RFDS

parameters.

Table 3-39: RFDS Parameter Settings

Step Action

NOTE

Log out of the BTS prior to perform this procedure.

1Using a text editor, verify the following fields are set correctly in the bts–#.cdf file:

EXAMPLE:

Asu1Equip = 1

Asu2Equip = 0 (1 if system is non-duplexed)

Mc1Equip = 0

Mc2Equip = 0

Mc3Equip = 0

Mc4Equip = 0

RfdsEquip = 2

TestOrigDN = ’123456789’

TsuEquip = 1

NOTE

The above is an example of entries extracted from the bts–#.cdf file that should have been generated

by the OMC–R and copied to the LMF. These fields will have been set by the OMC–R if the

RFDSPARM database is modified for the RFDS.

2Save changes and/or quit the editor.

3Log into the BTS using an LMF GUI session(refer to Table 3-6).

4 If no changes were made to the bts–#.cdf file fields listed in step 1, proceed to Step 7. If changes were

made, continue with Step 5.

5NOTE

To make certain the complete data download is accepted, the MGLI should be OOS_RAM (yellow)

when RFDS parameter settings are downloaded.

When changes are made to RFDS parameters in the bts–#.cdf file, data must be downloaded to the

MGLI by performing the following:

5a – To be sure it does not take control when the MGLI is disabled, manually disable the redundant

GLI card by unseating it from the backplane connectors and sliding it partially out of the shelf

slot.

5b – Click on the MGLI.

5c – Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Disable from the pull–down menu.

–– A status report window shows the status of the operation.

5d – When the operation is complete, click OK to close the status report window.

5e – Click on the MGLI (now OOS_RAM (yellow)).

5f – Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Download > Data from the pull–down menus

(selected devices do not change color when data is downloaded).

–– A status report window shows the status of the download.

. . . continued on next page

RFDS Set–up and Calibration 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-100

Table 3-39: RFDS Parameter Settings

Step Action

5g – Click OK to close the status report window.

5h – Click on the MGLI.

5i – Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Enable from the pull–down menu.

–– A status report window shows the status of the operation.

5j – When the operation is complete, click OK to close the status report window.

! CAUTION

When the MGLI changes to INS_ACT, data will automatically be downloaded to the RFDS. During

this process, the RFDS LED will slowly begin flashing red and green for approximately 2–3 minutes.

DO NOT attempt to perform any functions with the RFDS until the LED remains steady green.

5k – Re–seat the redundant GLI card into the backplane connectors and lock it in place with the ejector

tabs.

5l – Once the redundant GLI initializes, download data to it by selecting the card and, in the BTS

menu bar, clicking Device and selecting Download > Data from the pull–down menus.

6Any MCCs that were INS_ACT when the MGLI was disabled must be disabled, downloaded with

data, and re–enabled as follows:

6a – Select the devices to be reset by clicking on them or using Select from the BTS menu bar and

clicking on MCCs in the pull–down menu.

6b – In the BTS menu bar, click on Device and select Disable from the pull–down menu.

–– A status report window shows the status of the operation.

6c – Click OK to close the status report window.

6d – Repeat Step 6a to select the MCCs.

6e – Click on Device in the BTS menu bar and select Download > Data from the pull–down menu.

(Selected devices do not change colot when data is downoaded.)

– A status report window shows the status of the download.

6f – Click on OK to close the status report window.

6g – When data download is complete, enable the MCCs by following the procedure in Table 3-17.

7Click on the RFDS tab.

8Status the RFDS TSU by performing the following:

8a – Click on the SUA to select it.

8b – Click on TSU in the BTS menu bar, and select Status TSU from the pull–down menu.

–– A status report shows the software version number for the TSIC and SUA.

. . . continued on next page

RFDS Set–up and Calibration68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-101

Table 3-39: RFDS Parameter Settings

Step Action

8c – Click OK to close the status report window.

NOTE

If the LMF displays an error message, check the following:

SEnsure AMR cable is correctly connected from the BTS to the RFDS.

SVerify RFDS has power.

SVerify RFDS status LED is green.

SVerify entries in RFDS fields of the bts–#.cdf file are correct (refer to step 1).

SStatus the MGLI and ensure it is communicating (by Ethernet) with the LMF, and is in the proper

state (INS_ACT (bright green)).

RFDS Set–up and Calibration 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-102

RFDS TSU NAM Programming

The Number Assignment Module (NAM) information needs to be

programmed into the TSU before it can receive and process test calls, or

be used for any type of RFDS test. The RFDS TSU NAM must be

programmed with the appropriate system parameters and phone number

during hardware installation. The TSU phone and TSU MSI must be

recorded for each BTS used for OMC–R RFDS software configuration.

NOTE The user will only need to program the NAM for the initial

installation of the RFDS.

Explanation of Parameters Used When Programming the TSU NAM

Table 3-40 defines the parameters used when editing the tsu.nam file.

Table 3-40: Definition of Parameters

Access Overload Code

Slot Index

System ID

Network ID

These parameters are obtained from the switch.

Primary Channel A

Primary Channel B

Secondary Channel A

Secondary Channel B

These parameters are the channels which are to be used in operation

of the system.

Lock Code

Security Code

Service Level

Station Class Mark

Do NOT change.

IMSI MCC

IMSI 11 12 These fields are obtained at the OMC using the following command:

OMC000>disp bts–# imsi

If the fields are blank, replace the IMSI fields in the NAM file to 0,

otherwise use the values displayed by the OMC.

MIN Phone Number These fields are the phone number assigned to the mobile. The ESN

and MIN must be entered into the switch as well.

NOTE

This field is different from the TODN field in the bts–#.cdf file. The

MIN is the phone number of the RFDS subscriber, and the TODN is

the number the subscriber calls.

RFDS Set–up and Calibration68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-103

Valid NAM Ranges

Table 3-41 provides the valid NAM field ranges. If any of the fields are

missing or out-of–range, the RFDS will error out.

Table 3-41: Valid NAM Field Ranges

Valid Range

NAM Field Name Minimum Maximum

Access Overload Code 0 15

Slot Index 0 7

System ID 0 32767

Network ID 0 32767

Primary Channel A 25 1175

Primary Channel B 25 1175

Secondary Channel A 25 1175

Secondary Channel B 25 1175

Lock Code 0 999

Security Code 0 999999

Service Level N/A N/A

Station Class Mark 0 255

IMSI 11 12 0 99

IMSI MCC 0 999

MIN Phone Number N/A N/A

RFDS Set–up and Calibration 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-104

Set Antenna Map Data

The antenna map data must be entered manually if an RFDS is installed.

Antenna map data does not need to be entered if an RFDS is not

installed. The antenna map data is only used for RFDS tests and is

required if an RFDS is installed.

Prerequisite

SLMF is logged into the BTS

Follow the procedure in Table 3-42 to set antenna map data for the

RFDS.

Table 3-42: Set Antenna Map Data

Step Action

1Click on Util in the BTS menu bar, and select Edit > Antenna Map... from the pull–down menus.

–A tabbed data entry pop–up window will appear.

2In the data entry pop–up window, click on the TX Antenna Map or RX Antenna Map tab to select

the antenna map to be edited.

3Locate the carrier and sector number for which data is to be entered or edited, and click in the column

where entry or editing is needed.

4Enter/edit Antenna # and Antenna Label column data as needed for each carrier.

NOTE

Refer to the CDMA Help > Utility Menu > Edit–Antenna Map... section of LMF Help function

on–line documentation for antenna map examples.

5For each tab with changes, click on the Save button to save displayed values.

6Click on the Dismiss button to close the window.

NOTE

SValues entered or changed after the Save button was used will be lost when the window is

dismissed.

SEntered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. It is not necessary to log out and

log back into the LMF for changes to take effect.

RFDS Set–up and Calibration68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-105

Set RFDS Configuration Data

If an RFDS is installed, the RFDS configuration data must be manually

entered.

Prerequisite

SLMF is logged into the BTS

NOTE The entered antenna# index numbers must correspond to the

antenna# index numbers used in the antenna maps.

Follow the procedure in Table 3-43 to set RFDS configuration data.

Table 3-43: Set RFDS Configuration Data

Step Action

1Click on Util in the BTS menu bar, and select Edit > RFDS Configuration... from the pull–down

menus.

–A tabbed data entry pop–up window will appear.

2In the data entry pop–up window, click on the TX RFDS Configuration or RX RFDS Configuration

tab, as required.

3To add a new antenna number, perform the following:

3a – Click on the Add Row button.

3b – Click in the Antenna #, Cal Antenna, Scap Antenna, or Populate [Y/N] columns, as required.

3c – Enter the desired data.

4To edit existing values click in the data box to be changed and change the value.

NOTE

Refer to the CDMA Help > Utility Menu > Edit–RFDS Configuration... section of LMF Help

function on–line documentation for RFDS configuration data examples.

5To delete a row, click on the row and then click on the Delete Row button.

6For each tab with changes, click on the Save button to save displayed values.

7Click on the Dismiss button to close the window.

NOTE

SValues entered or changed after the Save button was used will be lost when the window is

dismissed.

SEntered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. It is not necessary to log out and

log back into the LMF for changes to take effect.

RFDS Set–up and Calibration 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-106

RFDS Calibration

The RFDS Calibration option is used to calibrate the RFDS TX and RX

paths.

TX Path Calibration – For a TX antenna path calibration the BTS

XCVR is keyed at a pre–determined power level and the BTS power

output level is measured by the RFDS. The power level is then measured

at the TX antenna directional coupler by the power measuring test

equipment item being used (power meter or analyzer). The difference

(offset) between the power level at the RFDS and the power level at the

TX antenna directional coupler is used as the TX RFDS calibration

offset value.

RX Path Calibration – For an RX antenna path calibration the RFDS is

keyed at a pre–determined power level and the power input level is

measured by the BTS BBX. A CDMA signal at the same power level

measured by the BTS BBX is then injected at the RX antenna directional

coupler by the communications system analyzer. The difference (offset)

between the RFDS–keyed power level and power level measured at the

BTS BBX is the RFDS RX calibration offset value.

RFDS calibration and the CAL file – The TX and RX RFDS

calibration offset values are written to the CAL file in the slot[385]

Block.

TSIC channel frequency – For each RFDS TSIC, the channel

frequency is determined at the lower third and upper third of the

appropriate band using the frequencies listed in Table 3-44.

Table 3-44: RFDS TSIC Calibration Channel Frequencies

System Channel Calibration Points

800 MHz (A and B) 341 and 682

1.9 GHz 408 and 791

WARNING Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUT

connector, verify that there are no CDMA channels keyed.

Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury and/or

equipment damage.

Prerequisites

STest equipment has been selected.

STest equipment and test cables have been calibrated.

STX calibration has been performed and BLO data has been

downloaded to the BBXs.

STest equipment and test cables are connected for TX calibration.

SAntenna map data has been entered for the site.

SBBXs are OOS–RAM.

RFDS Set–up and Calibration68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-107

RFDS Calibration Procedure

Follow the procedure in Table 3-45 to perform RFDS calibration.

Table 3-45: RFDS Calibration

Step Action

1In the LMF, select the CDMA BTS–xxx tab.

2If the BTS Control button is not selected (no black dot showing), click on the B button in the BTS

menu bar to select it.

3Select the BBX(s) assigned to the carrier(s) and sector(s) which will be used in RFDS calibration

(refer to Table 1-6 for BBX carrier and sector assignments).

4Click on RFDS in the BTS menu bar, and select RFDS Calibration... from the pull–down menu. An

RFDS Calibration set–up window will be displayed.

5In the Tests to Perform box, select TX Calibration or RX Calibration, as required

6Enter the appropriate channel number(s) (refer to Table 3-44) in the Channel Field box.

STo enter more than one channel number, use the following methods:

– Separate non–sequential channel numbers with a comma and no spaces;

for example: 247,585,742.

– Enter a range of sequential channels by typing the first and last channel numbers in the range

separated by a dash and no spaces;

for example: 385–395.

7If the frame is equipped with TX combiners, click in the Has Combiners checkbox.

8Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) from the Carriers pick list (hold down the Shift or Ctrl

key while clicking on pick list items to select multiple carrier(s)–sector(s)).

9Select the appropriate RX branch (Both, Main, or Diversity) in the drop–down list if performing RX

calibration.

10 Click on the OK button. A status report window is displayed, followed by a Directions pop–up

window.

11 Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.

12 When the test is completed, test results are displayed in the status report window.

13 Click on the OK button to close the status report window.

14 Click on the Frame tab.

15 Select the MGLI by clicking on it.

16 Download updated RFDS offset data to the MGLI (see Step 5 in Table 3-39).

RFDS Set–up and Calibration 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-108

Program TSU NAM

The NAM must be programmed before it can receive and process test

calls, or be used for any type of RFDS test.

Prerequisites

SMGLI is INS_ACT (bright green).

SSUA is powered up and has a code load.

Follow the procedure in Table 3-46 to program the TSU NAM.

Table 3-46: Program NAM Procedure

Step Action

1In the LMF, select the RFDS tab.

2Select the SUA by clicking on it.

3Click on TSU in the BTS menu bar, and select Program TSU NAM from the pull–down menu.

– A NAM programming window will appear.

4Enter the appropriate information in the boxes (see Table 3-40 and Table 3-41) .

5Click on the OK button to display the status report.

6Click on the OK button to close the status report window.

Alarms Testing68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-109

Alarms Testing

Alarm Verification

Alarms testing should be performed at a convenient point in the

optimization/ATP process, since the LMF is necessary to ensure that the

SC4812ET Lite is generating the appropriate alarms.

The SC 4812ET Lite is capable of concurrently monitoring 10 customer

defined input signals and four customer defined outputs, which interface

to the 50–pair punchblock. All alarms are defaulted to “Not Equipped”

during ATP testing. Testing of these inputs is achieved by triggering the

alarms and monitoring the LMF for state–transition messages from the

MGLI.

Alarm Reporting Display

The Alarm Monitor window can be displayed to list alarms that occur

after the window is displayed. The Alarm Monitor window is accessed

from the BTS menu bar.

The following buttons are included in the Alarm Monitor window:

SThe Options button allows for a severity level (Warning, Minor,

Major, Critical, and Unknown) selection. The default is all levels.

To change the level of alarms reported click on the Options button

and highlight the desired alarm level(s). To select multiple levels press

the Ctrl key (for individual selections) or Shift key (for a range of

selections) while clicking on the desired levels.

SThe Pause button can be used to pause/stop the display of alarms.

When the Pause button is clicked the name of the button changes to

Continue. When the Continue button is click the display of alarms

will continue. Alarms that occur between the time the Pause button is

clicked and the Continue button is clicked will not be displayed.

SThe Clear button can be used to clear the Alarm Monitor display.

New alarms that occur after the Clear button is clicked will be

displayed.

SThe Dismiss button is used to dismiss/close the Alarm Monitor

display.

Alarm Testing Set–up

Prepare for any alarm testing by following the procedures in Table 3-47.

Table 3-47: Alarm Testing Preparation

Step Action

1If it has not already been done, refer to the procedure in Table 3-5 to connect the LMF computer

terminal to the frame LAN A connector.

2If it has not already been done, refer to Table 3-6 to start a GUI LMF session.

3Click on Util in the BTS menu bar, and select Alarm Monitor... from the pull–down menu.

– An Alarm Monitor window will open.

Alarms Testing 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

3-110

AC Fail Alarm

Table 3-48 gives instructions on testing the AC Fail Alarm.

Table 3-48: AC Fail Alarm

Step Action

1NOTE

– Back–up batteries must be installed when performing this test.

– To prevent inadvertently shutting down the RF compartment electronics, the batteries should be

charged before performing this test.

Set the ACLC MAIN circuit breaker to OFF.

– The LMF should report an alarm for an AC Fail condition as BTS Relay #21, BTS Relay #23,

BTS Relay #24, and BTS Relay #29 contacts, respectively.

– On the MAP, the MAJOR ALARM (red), MINOR ALARM (amber), and RECTIFIER FAIL

(red) LEDs should light.

– On the rectifiers, the DC and PWR LEDs should light red.

2Set the ACLC MAIN circuit breaker to ON.

– On the LMF, the AC Fail alarm should clear.

– On the MAP, the MAJOR ALARM, MINOR ALARM, and RECTIFIER FAIL LEDs should

extinguish.

– On the rectifiers, the DC and PWR LEDs should change to green.

Minor Alarm

Table 3-49 gives instructions on performing a test to display a minor

alarm.

Table 3-49: Minor Alarm

Step Action

1Set the TCP switch on the MAP to OFF. This will generate a minor alarm.

– The LMF should report the minor alarm as BTS Relay #24 contacts.

– The TC DISABLE (red) and MINOR ALARM (amber) LEDs on the MAP should light.

2Set the TCP switch to ON.

– The alarm condition indications should clear.

Before Leaving the Site

If no further operations are required after performing the alarm tests,

complete the requirements in Table 5-8 before leaving the site.

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

4-1

Chapter 4

Automated Acceptance Test

Procedures

Automated Acceptance Test Procedure 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

4-2

Automated Acceptance Test Procedure

Introduction

The Acceptance Test Procedures (ATP) allow Cellular Field Engineers

(CFEs) to run automated acceptance tests on all BTS subsystem devices

equipped in the CDF using the LMF and the test equipment it supports.

The CFE can choose to save the results of ATP tests to a report file from

which ATP reports are generated for later printing. See the Generating an

ATP Report section in this chapter.

Because test equipment functions during acceptance testing are

controlled by the LMF through the GPIB, only the test equipment

models supported by the LMF can be used.

NOTE – Before using the LMF, read the Release Notes “Caveats”

section in the LMF Help function on–line documentation

for any applicable information.

– The ATP test is to be performed on out-of-service sectors

only.

– DO NOT substitute test equipment with other models not

supported by the LMF.

Refer to Chapter 3 for detailed interconnection information needed for

calibrating equipment, cables, and other test equipment set components.

Reduced ATP

NOTE Equipment has been factory–tested for FCC compliance. If

license–governing bodies require documentation supporting BTS

site compliance with regulations, a full ATP may be necessary.

Perform the Reduced ATP only if reports for the specific BTS

site are NOT required.

After downloading the proper operational software to the BTS, the CFE

must perform these procedures (minimum recommendation):

1. Verify the TX/RX paths by performing TX Calibration, TX Audit,

and FER tests.

2. Retrieve Calibration Data required for normal site operation.

Should failures occur while performing the specified tests, refer to the

Basic Troubleshooting section of this manual for help in determining the

failure point. Once the point of failure has been identified and corrected,

refer to the BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix (Table C-1) to

determine the applicable test that must be performed.

In the unlikely event that the BTS passes these tests but has a forward

link problem during normal operation, the CFE should then perform the

additional TX tests for troubleshooting: TX spectral mask, TX rho, and

TX code domain.

Automated Acceptance Test Procedure68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

4-3

ATP Test Options

ATP tests can be run individually or as one of the following groups:

SAll TX: TX tests verify the performance of the BTS transmit

elements. These include the GLI, MCC, BBX, trunking modules, the

LPAs, and passive components including splitters, combiners,

bandpass filter(s), and RF cables.

SAll RX: The RX test verifies the performance of the BTS receive

elements. These include the MPC, EMPC (for companion frames),

BBX, MCC, GLI modules, and the passive components including RX

filters and RF cables.

SAll TX/RX: Executes all TX and RX tests.

SFull Optimization: Executes the TX calibration, downloads BLO,

and executes the TX audit before running all TX and RX tests.

ATP Prerequisites

Before attempting to run any ATP tests, be sure the following have been

completed:

SBTS has been optimized (BBXs calibrated and BLOs downloaded)

(Chapter 3)

SThe carrier(s) and/or sector(s) to be tested have been taken out of

service at the CBSC.

SLMF is logged into the BTS.

SCSMs, GLIs, BBXs, MCCs and TSU (if the RFDS is installed) have

correct code and data loads.

SPrimary CSM and GLI are INS_ACT (bright green).

SMCCs are INS_ACT (bright green).

SNo BBXs are keyed (transmitting).

SBBXs are OOS_RAM (yellow).

STest cables are calibrated.

STest equipment has been selected, warmed up 60 minutes, and

calibrated.

SGPIB is on.

SBTS transmit connectors are properly terminated for the test(s) to be

performed.

WARNING 1. All transmit connectors must be properly terminated for all

ATP tests.

2. Before the FER is run, be sure that one of the following is

done:

– All transmitter connectors are properly terminated

– All LPAs are turned OFF (circuit breakers pulled)

Failure to observe these warnings may result in bodily injury or

equipment damage.

Automated Acceptance Test Procedure 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

4-4

TX/RX Antenna Connections

Starter (Stand–alone) Frames

Refer to NO TAG or NO TAG for identification of starter frame transmit

and receive antenna connections where measurements are to be taken.

All ATP test equipment connections for starter frames are made at the

ANTENNAS connectors on the RF interface panel.

Companion Frames

TX ATP Antenna Connections – Each companion frame at a site

connects independently to transmit antennas. Test equipment

connections for TX ATPs on each companion frame are made at the

ANTENNAS connectors as on starter frames. Companion frame

ANTENNAS connectors are shown in NO TAG and NO TAG.

Antenna Connections for RX main ATP – Each companion frame at a

site uses independent receive antennas for main RX signals. The main

RX signals are either routed through TRDC RX ANTENNAS

connectors (NO TAG) or duplexed with TX signals through the single

DRDC ANTENNAS connectors (NO TAG).

Antenna Connections for RX diversity ATP – Companion frame

diversity RX signals are obtained from the RX main antenna of the

collocated companion frame. The main RX signals are sent from the

collocated companion frame through inter–frame diversity RX cables to

the RX EXPANSION 1B, 2B, or 3B connectors of the frame where they

are used for diversity RX (refer to Figure 4-1). Diversity RX ATP test

equipment connections are made at one of two different locations

depending on whether or not the companion frame under test is

connected to a collocated companion frame. Connection points for each

situation are as follows:

SConnected companion frames: When inter–frame diversity RX

cables are connected, connect test equipment for diversity RX ATP at

the ANTENNAS connectors of the collocated companion frame as

shown in Figure 4-1 and listed in Table 4-1. Be sure MPC is selected

before logging the LMF into the frame or FER will fail.

Automated Acceptance Test Procedure68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

4-5

SDisconnected companion frames: When inter–frame diversity RX

cables are disconnected, connect test equipment for diversity RX ATP

at the RX EXPANSION connectors 1B, 2B, or 3B on the frame under

test. Refer to Figure 4-1 and Table 4-2. Be sure EMPC is selected

before logging the LMF into the frame or FER will fail.

Figure 4-1: SC4812ET Lite Companion Frame Diversity RX Simplified Interconnection Diagram

MPC

CIO

EMPC

INTER–FRAME

DIVERSITY RX

CABLES

RX MAIN

(3 SECTORS) RX DIVERSITY

(3 SECTORS)

RX MAIN

(3)

BBXS

ANTENNAS

CONNECTORS

(TRDC/DRDC)

RX EXPANSION

CONNECTORS

SC4812ET LITE COMPANION FRAME 1

MPC

CIO

EMPC

RX MAIN

(3)

BBXS

SC4812ET LITE COMPANION FRAME 2

RX EXPANSION

CONNECTORS

ANTENNAS

CONNECTORS

(TRDC/DRDC)

SC4812ETL0045–1

SIGNALS: RX MAIN

RX DIVERSITY

NOTE: ANTENNAS connectors represent TRDC/DRDC portion of receive path.

RX DIVERSITY ATP CONNECTION POINTS:

1: For Companion Frame 1 when inter–frame diversity

RX cables are connected.

2: For Companion Frame 1 when inter–frame diversity

RX cables are disconnected.

3: For Companion Frame 2 when inter–frame diversity

RX cables are connected.

4: For Companion Frame 2 when inter–frame diversity

RX cables are disconnected.

RX EXPANSION

CONNECTORS

RX EXPANSION

CONNECTORS

RX MAIN

(3 SECTORS)

RX DIVERSITY

(3 SECTORS)

Automated Acceptance Test Procedure 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

4-6

Table 4-1: To Perform Companion Frame Diversity RX FER,

Inter–frame RX Cables Connected

(Set Multi–Channel Preselector to MPC)

On Connect RX Test Cable to

Collocated Companion Frame

Carrier Sector

Collocated Companion Frame

RX or Duplexed TX/RX

ANTENNAS Connector

1 1A

12 2A

3 3A

1 1A

22 2A

3 3A

Table 4-2: To Perform Companion Frame Diversity RX FER,

Inter–frame RX Cables Disconnected

(Set Multi–Channel Preselector to EMPC)

On Connect RX Test Cable to

Frame Under Test

Carrier Sector

rame

est

RX EXPANSION Connector

1 1B

12 2B

3 3B

1 1B

22 2B

3 3B

Acceptance Tests – Test Set–up68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

4-7

Acceptance Tests – Test Set–up

Required Test Equipment

The following test equipment is required:

SLMF

SPower meter (used with HP8921A/600 and Advantest R3465)

SCommunications system analyzer

SSignal generator for FER testing (required for all communications

system analyzers for 1X FER)

WARNING –Before installing any test equipment directly to any BTS

TX OUT connector, verify that there are no CDMA

channels keyed.

– At active sites, have the OMCR/CBSC place the carrier

assigned to the LPAs under test OOS. Failure to do so can

result in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.

NOTE The test equipment must be re–calibrated before using it to

perform the TX Acceptance Tests.

Acceptance Test Equipment Set Up

All ATP testing – Follow the steps in Table 4-3 to set up test equipment

for all tests.

Table 4-3: Set Up Test Equipment – TX Output Verify/Control Tests

Step Action

1If it has not already been done, interface the LMF computer to the BTS (refer to Table 3-5 and

Figure 3-3).

2If it has not already been done, refer to Table 3-6 to start a GUI LMF session and log into the BTS.

3If it has not already been done, refer to Figure 3-17, Figure 3-18, Figure 3-19, Figure 3-20,

Figure 3-21, or Figure 3-22, as applicable, for the test equipment and antenna duplexing being used, to

connect test equipment for acceptance testing.

NOTE

LMF–based measurements factor in TX test cable loss between the RFMF and test equipment. If

additional attenuation, such as external TX combiners, is inserted in the path, it must be identified to

the LMF by including it in the TX test cable calibration. If this is not possible, include the attenuation

in the TX path by editing cable loss values (refer to Table 3-29). Failure to do this will result in test

inaccuracies and potential for erroneous ATP failures because the additional losses would not be

compensated for in the test measurements.

Acceptance Tests – Test Set–up 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

4-8

Companion frame All TX/RX, All RX, and FER for Diversity RX –

When performing All TX/RX, All RX, or FER ATP for companion

frame diversity RX, perform the additional test equipment set–up

procedures in Table 4-4.

Table 4-4: Additional Diversity RX Test Set–up for Companion Frames

Step Action

1If the LMF is logged into the BTS, log out of the BTS.

2If the inter–frame diversity RX cabling to a collocated companion frame is:

SConnected to the companion frame under test, proceed to step 3.

SDisconnected from the companion frame under test, proceed to step 7.

3For companion frames with inter–frame diversity RX cables connected, click on the LMF Login tab.

4In the Equipage Information box, select MPC from the Multi–Channel Preselector picklist.

5Make RX test cable connections for diversity RX FER according to Figure 4-1 and Table 4-1.

6Proceed to step 10.

7For companion frames with inter–frame diversity RX cables disconnected, click on the LMF Login

tab.

8In the Equipage Information box, select EMPC from the Multi–Channel Preselector picklist.

9Make RX test cable connections for diversity RX FER according to Figure 4-1 and Table 4-2.

10 Click on the LMF BTS# tab, and return to the procedure for the ATP being performed.

Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

4-9

Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests

All–inclusive Tests

General – The all–inclusive acceptance tests are performed from the

LMF GUI environment. These all–inclusive tests are called abbreviated

ATPs because they execute various combinations of individual

acceptance tests with a single command. This allows verification of

multiple aspects of BTS performance while minimizing time needed for

individual test set up and initiation.

Abbreviated ATP Options – There are three abbreviated acceptance

tests which evaluate different performance aspects of the BTS. This

allows the CFE to select testing to meet the specific requirements for

individual maintenance and performance verification situations. The

following summarizes the coverage of each abbreviated test:

SAll TX/RX. Performs all transmit and receive ATPs on the selected

MCCs and BBXs.

SAll TX. Performs complete set of transmit ATPs on the selected

MCCs and BBXs. Testing is the equivalent of performing all of the

following individual tests:

–TX Mask Test

–Rho Test

–Pilot Time Offset Test

–Code Domain Power Test

SAll RX. Performs complete receive ATP on the selected MCCs and

BBXs. Testing is the equivalent of performing the following:

–FER Test

Abbreviated ATP Procedures – Procedures to accomplish each type of

abbreviated ATP are included in the following subsections.

Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

4-10

All TX/RX ATP Test

Follow the procedures in Table 4-5 to perform the abbreviated,

all–inclusive transmit and receive test.

Table 4-5: All TX/RX ATP Test Procedure

Step Action

1Set up the test equipment initially for abbreviated tests as described in Table 4-3.

2If a companion frame is being tested and either BOTH or DIV is to be selected in step 7, perform the

additional test equipment set–up in Table 4-4 for the diversity RX portion of the ATP.

NOTE

If the LMF has been logged into the BTS with a different Multi–Channel Preselector setting than the

one to be used for this test, the LMF must be logged out of the BTS and logged in again with the new

Multi–Channel Preselector setting. Using the wrong MPC setting can cause a false test failure.

3Select the BBXs and MCCs to be tested.

4Click on Tests in the BTS menu bar, and select All TX/RX ATP... from the pull–down menu.

5Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayed in the

Channels/Carrier pick list.

NOTE

To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while clicking on pick list items to select

multiple carrier(s)–sector(s).

6Verify that the correct channel number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier # Channels

box. If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.cdf files from the CBSC.

NOTE

If necessary, the correct channel number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channels box.

7NOTE

If a companion frame with the inter–frame diversity RX cabling disconnected is being tested do not

select BOTH in this step. The RX main and diversity paths must be tested separately for this

configuration because each requires a different Multi–Coupler Preselector type to provide the proper

test signal gain.

Select the appropriate RX branch (BOTH, MAIN, or DIVersity) in the drop–down list.

8In the Rate Set box, select the appropriate data rate (1=9600 3=9600 1X) from the drop–down list.

NOTE

The Rate Set selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test.

9Enter the channel elements to be tested for the RX ATP in the Channel Element(s) box. By default,

all channel elements are specified.

Use one of thefollowing methods to enter more than one channel element:

– Enter non–sequential channel elements separated by a comma and no spaces (for example;

0,5,15).

– Enter a range of sequential channel elements by typing the first and last channel elements

separated by two periods (for example; 0..15).

NOTE

The channel element numbers are 0.based; that is the first channel element is 0.

. . . continued on next page

Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

4-11

Table 4-5: All TX/RX ATP Test Procedure

Step Action

10 In the Test Pattern box, select the test pattern to use for the acceptance tests from the drop–down list

(refer to “Test Pattern Drop–down Pick List” under “TX Calibration and the LMF” in the Bay Level

Offset Calibration section of Chapter 3).

11 Click OK to display a status bar followed by a Directions pop-up window.

12 NOTE

When testing diversity RX paths on companion frames, be sure to follow the RX test cable connection

information in Table 4-1 or Table 4-2, as applicable, during this step.

Follow cable connection directions as they are displayed, and click the Continue button to begin

testing.

– As the ATP process is completed, results will be displayed in the status report window.

13 Click the Save Results or Dismiss button.

NOTE

If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file.

Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests 68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003

1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

4-12

All TX ATP Test

Follow the procedures in Table 4-6 to perform the abbreviated,

all–inclusive transmit test.

Table 4-6: All TX ATP Test Procedure

Step Action

1Set up the test equipment for abbreviated tests per Table 4-3.

2Select the BBXs and MCCs to be tested.

3Click on Tests in the BTS menu bar, and select All TX ATP... from the pull–down menu.

4Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayed in the

Channels/Carrier pick list.

NOTE

To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while clicking on pick list items to select

multiple carrier(s)–sector(s).

5Verify that the correct channel number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier # Channels

box. If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.cdf files from the CBSC.

NOTE

If necessary, the correct channel number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channels box.

6In the Rate Set box, select the appropriate transfer rate (1 = 9600, 3 = 9600 1X) from the drop–down

list.

NOTE

The Rate Set Selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test.

7In the Test Pattern box, select the test pattern to use for the acceptance test from the drop–down list

(refer to “Test Pattern Drop–down Pick List” under “TX Calibration and the LMF” in the Bay Level

Offset Calibration section of Chapter 3).

8 Click OK to display a status bar followed by a Directions pop-up window.

9Follow cable connection directions as they are displayed, and click the Continue button to begin

testing.

– As the ATP process is completed, results will be displayed in the status report window.

10 Click the Save Results or Dismiss button.

NOTE

If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file.

All RX ATP Test

Follow the procedure in Table 4-7 to perform the abbreviated,

all–inclusive receive test.

Table 4-7: All RX ATP Test Procedure

Step Action

1Set up the test equipment for abbreviated tests per Table 4-3.

. . . continued on next page

Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests68P64115A18–1

Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x

DRAFT

4-13

Table 4-7: All RX ATP Test Procedure

Step Action

2If a companion frame is being tested and either BOTH or DIV is to be selected in step 7, perform the

additional test equipment set–up in Table 4-4 for the diversity RX portion of the ATP.

NOTE

If the LMF has been logged into the BTS with a different Multi–Channel Preselector setting than the

one to be used for this test, the LMF must be logged out of the BTS and logged in again with the new

Multi–Channel Preselector setting. Using the wrong MPC setting can cause a false test failure.

3Select the BBXs and MCCs to be tested.

4Click on Tests in the BTS menu bar, and select All RX ATP... from the pull–down menu.

5Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayed in the

Channels/Carrier pick list.

NOTE

To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while clicking on pick list items to select

multiple carrier(s)–sector(s).

6Verify that the correct channel number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier # Channels

box. If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.cdf files from the CBSC.

NOTE

If necessary, the correct channel number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channels box.

7NOTE

If a companion frame with the inter–frame diversity RX cabling disconnected is being tested do not

select BOTH in this step. The RX main and diversity paths must be tested separately for this

configuration because each requires a different Multi–Coupler Preselector type to provide the proper

test signal gain.

Select the appropriate RX branch (BOTH, MAIN, or DIVersity) in the drop–down list.

8In the Rate Set box, select the appropriate data rate (1=9600, 2=14400, 3=9600 1X) from the

drop–down list.

NOTE

The Rate Set selection of 1 is only available if non–1X cards are selected for the test.

The Rate Set selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test.

9Enter the channel elements to be tested for the RX ATP in the Channel Element(s) box. By default,

all channel elements are specified.

Use one of the following methods to enter more than one channel element:

– Enter non–sequential channel elements separated by a comma and no spaces (for example;

0,5,15).

– Enter a range of sequential channel elements by typing the first and last channel elements

separated by two periods (for example; 0..15).

NOTE

The channel element numbers are 0.based; that is the first channel element is 0.

10 Click OK to display a status bar followed by a Directions pop-up window.

. . . continued on next page

Nokia Solutions and Networks T5EE1 SC4812T Lite 1X/EVDO @ 800 MHz CDMA BTS User Manual TLite

Nokia Solutions and Networks SC4812T Lite 1X/EVDO @ 800 MHz CDMA BTS TLite

Contents

Users Manual 1

Navigation menu

Namespaces

Views

Navigation